SlideShare a Scribd company logo
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
i
DWS
Digital Wave Simulator
R E L E A S E 8 . 5
USER'S MANUAL
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
ii
Copyright 1985 – 2015 Piero Belforte, Giancarlo Guaschino
This document contains proprietary information of Piero Belforte and Giancarlo
Guaschino, Torino, Italy.
DWS (Digital Wave Simulator) is a trademark of Piero Belforte and Giancarlo
Guaschino.
DWV (Digital Wave Viewer) is a trademark of Piero Belforte and Giancarlo
Guaschino.
SWAN (Simulation by Wave ANalysis) is a trademark of Piero Belforte.
All rights are reserved.
The contents of this document may not be copied or reproduced in any form
without the express prior permission of Piero Belforte and Giancarlo Guaschino.
Piero Belforte and Giancarlo Guaschino shall not be liable for errors contained
herein and the information contained in this document is subject to change
without notice.
The authors wish to thank their friend Flavio Maggioni for his important
contribution to the early edition of this manual.
Piero Belforte's info can be found at http://www.linkedin.com/in/pierobelforte
An up-to-date list of DWS related web publications is also available at this
link.
SWAN/DWS project story is available here: SWAN Story
An online version of DWS with a schematic capture is available both as Web and
mobile applications: Spicy SWAN.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
iii
DWS 8.5 USER MANUAL
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Table of Contents DWS
v
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS ............................................................................................................V
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL FEATURES............................................................................... 1-1
1.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................. 1-2
1.2 GENERAL USE CONSIDERATIONS ................................................................................... 1-4
1.2.1 Time Step.............................................................................................................. 1-4
1.2.2 Elements............................................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.3 Two-Port Element Conversion .............................................................................. 1-7
1.2.4 Reference Impedance...........................................................................................1-10
1.2.5 Delay Discretization............................................................................................1-11
1.2.6 DWS Operation ...................................................................................................1-13
1.2.7 Memory Requirements.........................................................................................1-15
1.3 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1-16
1.4 INPUT FORMAT ............................................................................................................1-17
1.5 OUTPUT FILE ...............................................................................................................1-18
1.6 REPORT FILE ...............................................................................................................1-21
1.7 STARTING DWS...........................................................................................................1-22
CHAPTER 2. PASSIVE ELEMENTS................................................................................. 2-1
2.1 LINEAR RESISTORS ....................................................................................................... 2-3
2.2 PIECE-WISE LINEAR RESISTORS .................................................................................... 2-4
2.3 TIME-CONTROLLED LINEAR RESISTORS......................................................................... 2-6
2.3.1 DC Resistor Function ........................................................................................... 2-9
2.3.2 Pulse Resistor Function .......................................................................................2-10
2.3.3 PulsePoly Resistor Function ...............................................................................2-11
2.3.4 PulseErfc Resistor Function.................................................................................2-12
2.3.5 Erfc Resistor Function.........................................................................................2-13
2.3.6 Delta Resistor Function .......................................................................................2-14
2.3.7 Sinusoidal Resistor Function................................................................................2-15
2.3.8 Piece-Wise Linear Resistor Function....................................................................2-16
2.3.9 PulsePwl Resistor Function .................................................................................2-17
2.3.10 File Resistor Function........................................................................................2-18
2.3.11 PulseFile Resistor Function ...............................................................................2-19
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Table of Contents DWS
vi
2.4 VOLTAGE-CONTROLLED RESISTORS.............................................................................2-21
2.5 CURRENT-CONTROLLED RESISTORS .............................................................................2-25
2.6 STATIC TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FOR VOLTAGE OR CURRENT-CONTROLLED RESISTORS ...2-29
2.6.1 Linear Static Transfer Function ..........................................................................2-29
2.6.2 Piece-Wise Linear Static Transfer Function.........................................................2-30
2.6.3 File Static Transfer Function...............................................................................2-31
2.6.4 Threshold Static Transfer Function......................................................................2-32
2.6.5 Hysteresis Static Transfer Function .....................................................................2-33
2.7 DYNAMIC TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FOR VOLTAGE OR CURRENT-CONTROLLED RESISTORS2-34
2.7.1 Unit-step Dynamic Response ...............................................................................2-35
2.7.2 S-plane Dynamic Transfer Function.....................................................................2-38
2.7.3 Z-plane Dynamic Transfer Function ....................................................................2-40
2.8 LINEAR CAPACITORS ...................................................................................................2-42
2.9 LINEAR INDUCTORS .....................................................................................................2-44
2.10 COUPLED INDUCTORS ................................................................................................2-46
2.11 UNBALANCED TRANSMISSION LINES ..........................................................................2-48
2.12 BALANCED TRANSMISSION LINES...............................................................................2-50
2.13 UNIT-DELAY TRANSMISSION LINES............................................................................2-52
2.14 IDEAL TRANSFORMERS ..............................................................................................2-54
2.15 JUNCTION DIODES......................................................................................................2-56
CHAPTER 3. INDEPENDENT SOURCES .........................................................................3-1
3.1 INDEPENDENT VOLTAGE SOURCES (THEVENIN EQUIVALENT)..........................................3-3
3.2 INDEPENDENT CURRENT SOURCES (NORTON EQUIVALENT) ............................................3-4
3.3 INDEPENDENT SOURCE FUNCTIONS ................................................................................3-5
3.3.1 DC Source Function..............................................................................................3-5
3.3.2 Pulse Source Function...........................................................................................3-6
3.3.3 PulsePoly Source Function...................................................................................3-7
3.3.4 PulseErfc Source Function ....................................................................................3-9
3.3.5 Erfc Source Function...........................................................................................3-10
3.3.6 Delta Source Function.........................................................................................3-11
3.3.7 Sinusoidal Source Function .................................................................................3-12
3.3.8 Piece-Wise Linear Source Function .....................................................................3-13
3.3.9 PulsePwl Source Function...................................................................................3-14
3.3.10 File Source Function .........................................................................................3-15
3.3.11 PulseFile Source Function.................................................................................3-16
3.4 SOURCE FUNCTIONS WITH A PARAMETER CONTROLLED BY A NODE VOLTAGE...............3-18
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Table of Contents DWS
vii
3.5 BINARY DIGIT SEQUENCE ............................................................................................3-19
3.5.1 Sequence Definition.............................................................................................3-20
3.5.2 Single Sequence...................................................................................................3-21
3.5.3 Periodic Sequence ...............................................................................................3-22
3.5.4 Burst Sequence....................................................................................................3-22
CHAPTER 4. CONTROLLED SOURCES......................................................................... 4-1
4.1 VOLTAGE-CONTROLLED VOLTAGE SOURCES................................................................. 4-3
4.2 VOLTAGE-CONTROLLED CURRENT SOURCES ................................................................. 4-5
4.3 CURRENT-CONTROLLED VOLTAGE SOURCES ................................................................. 4-7
4.4 CURRENT-CONTROLLED CURRENT SOURCES ................................................................. 4-9
4.5 MULTIPLYING VOLTAGE-CONTROLLED VOLTAGE SOURCES..........................................4-11
4.6MULTIPLYINGVOLTAGE-CONTROLLEDCURRENTSOURCES.............................................................4-13
4.7 STATIC TRANSFER FUNCTIONS .....................................................................................4-15
4.7.1 Linear Static Transfer Function ...........................................................................4-15
4.7.2 Piece-Wise Linear Static Transfer Function .........................................................4-16
4.7.3 File Static Transfer Function ...............................................................................4-17
4.7.4 Threshold Static Transfer Function......................................................................4-18
4.7.5 Hysteresis Static Transfer Function......................................................................4-19
4.8 DYNAMIC TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FOR VOLTAGE OR CURRENT-CONTROLLED SOURCES..4-20
4.8.1 Unit-step Dynamic Response................................................................................4-21
4.8.2 S-plane Dynamic Transfer Function.....................................................................4-24
4.8.3 Z-plane Dynamic Transfer Function.....................................................................4-26
CHAPTER 5. S-PARAMETER ELEMENTS..................................................................... 5-1
5.1 INTRODUCTION TO S-PARAMETER ELEMENTS ................................................................ 5-2
5.2 1-PORT ELEMENTS DEFINED BY S-PARAMETERS ............................................................ 5-4
5.3 2-PORT ELEMENTS DEFINED BY S-PARAMETERS ............................................................ 5-5
5.4 3-PORT ELEMENTS DEFINED BY S-PARAMETERS ............................................................ 5-6
5.5 4-PORT ELEMENTS DEFINED BY S-PARAMETERS ............................................................ 5-7
5.6 S-PARAMETER DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................... 5-8
5.6.1 Piece-Wise Linear S-Parameter Description ......................................................... 5-8
5.6.2 File S-Parameter Description ..............................................................................5-10
CHAPTER 6. ADAPTORS.................................................................................................. 6-1
6.1 GENERAL FEATURES ..................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2 SERIES ADAPTORS ........................................................................................................ 6-3
6.3 BIMODAL ADAPTORS .................................................................................................... 6-5
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Table of Contents DWS
viii
6.4 MULTIMODAL ADAPTORS ..............................................................................................6-7
CHAPTER 7. SUBCIRCUITS AND CHAINS.....................................................................7-1
7.1 GENERAL FEATURES......................................................................................................7-2
7.2 SUBCIRCUITS.................................................................................................................7-3
7.2.1 .SUBCKT Statement ..............................................................................................7-3
7.2.2 .ENDS Statement...................................................................................................7-4
7.2.3 Subcircuit Calls.....................................................................................................7-4
7.3 CHAINS OF CELLS ..........................................................................................................7-5
7.3.1 .CELL Statement....................................................................................................7-5
7.3.2 .ENDC Statement ..................................................................................................7-6
7.3.3 Cell Calls..............................................................................................................7-6
CHAPTER 8. CONTROL STATEMENTS..........................................................................8-8
8.1 .OPTIONS STATEMENT ................................................................................................8-9
8.2 .TRAN STATEMENT.....................................................................................................8-10
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
DWS General Features
Chapter 1 1-1
Chapter 1
G e n e r a l F e a t u r e s
1.
1.1 Introduction
1.2 General use considerations
1.2.1 Time step
1.2.2 Elements
1.2.3 Two-port element conversion
1.2.4 Reference impedance
1.2.5 Delay discretization
1.2.6 DWS operation
1.2.7 Memory requirements
1.3 Circuit description
1.4 Input format
1.5 Output file
1.6 Report file
1.7 Starting DWS
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
DWS General Features
Chapter 1 1-2
1.1 Introduction
DWS (Digital Wave Simulator) is a revolutionary electrical circuit simulator
implemented with the aim of dealing with the needs of advanced electronic
design in a more effective way than traditional tools. Using advanced concepts
and unique powerful DSP (Digital Signal Processing) wave algorithms instead of
classical Nodal Analysis (NA), DWS can perform simulations not feasible using
NA tools. While traditional simulators are based on EQUATION SOLVERS,
DWS is based on WAVE PROCESSORS.
As known, NA-based simulation engines suffer of poor modeling capability of
signal propagation effects because Nodal Analysis assumes no signal
propagation within the electrical network under analysis. This last assumption is
no more valid for dealing with modern high-speed circuitry where signal
transition times are of the same order of magnitude or even lower than signal
propagation delays.
DWS was created by engineers for modeling and simulation of high-speed
circuits and systems: DWS: early applications. The use of wave variables and
scattering blocks (circuital elements and nodes) instead of classical voltages and
currents of NA, leads to an extremely accurate and fast digital model of the
electrical network under analysis :Application brochure (1989).
Very accurate and effective models of both active and passive electronic devices
can be directly obtained by means of time-domain experimental characterizations
with no need of knowledge of the internal structure of them (BTM: Behavioral
Time Modeling technique). Multiport time-domain S-parameter blocks can be
easily built up starting from actual TDR (Time Domain Reflectometer)
measurements using efficient PWL (PieceWise Linear) description of behaviors.
Due to STABILITY of DWS wave algorithms, there is no need of strict
CAUSALITY and PASSIVITY of S-parameter behaviors. In this way, very
accurate and stable models of lossy interconnections (2-port, 4-port) can be
easily built up: High-performance modeling & simulation.
PWL behaviors can be used to describe non-linear resistors, allowing the user to
simulate non-linear circuits that are not affordable with conventional NA
simulators. I/O macromodels of digital integrated circuits, as the IBIS standard
models, can be easily supported: SI/PI application course. Non-linear circuits
including CHAOTIC circuits and systems can be easily simulated by DWS
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
DWS General Features
Chapter 1 1-3
without iterations and related convergence problems. Simulation throughput is in
the order of Megasamples/sec compared to Kilosamples/sec of NA simulators.
Very fast and accurate Transmission Line models open the way to very effective
Transmission Line Modeling (TLM) of actual devices including 2-D lossy signal
propagation effects. 2-D arrays of lossy Transmission Lines described by PWL
Scattering Parameters can be used to build up accurate and fast models of power
distribution planes: Modeling of power distribution planes.
Working at fixed time step, DWS is fully Nyquist criterion compliant, while NA
simulators are not. Wideband simulations are quickly feasible by using very
small time steps and FFT post-processing leads to accurate results in frequency
domain due to oversampling.
The user can monitor a complete set of variables at each node of the circuit
including Voltage, Current, Power, Incident and Reflected Waves etc. without
any addition of extra elements as required by NA simulators.
DWS algorithms are so fast and powerful that very complex networks with
hundred thousand elements can be dealt with in seconds or minutes even for
hundred thousand out samples. For this reason they have been utilized by major
electronic system manufacturers for fast and accurate POST-LAYOUT
simulations of complex Multiboard systems including 2-D models of Power
Distribution network and accurate 4-port IBIS models of active devices I/Os:
PRESTO.
For the above reasons, DWS can be considered something more than simply a
simulator: it is also a powerful modeling and simulation environment with a 4-
decade long application history to state-of-the-art circuits and systems.
DWS utilizes a SPICE-like syntax for network description. Powerful primitives
permit a very efficient description of network elements and stimulus signals.
PieceWise Linear (PWL) fittings and stored samples coming from previous
simulations or measurements can be used as behavioral descriptions. In the same
way the outputs coming from other analog simulators can be utilized to get
DWS-compatible behavioral models.
DWS and its companion graphical post-processor DWV (Digital Wave Viewer)
belongs to the SWAN modeling and simulation environment.
An online version of DWS with a schematic capture is available both as Web and
mobile applications: Spicy SWAN.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
DWS General Features
Chapter 1 1-4
1.2 General Use Considerations
Even if DWS use is very similar to SPICE, its internal operation is completely
different from the conventional analog simulators using Newton-Raphson
iterative loops and NA sparse-matrix techniques. DWS utilizes a brand-new
technique that converts the electrical network into a numerical equivalent
operating like a true DSP (Digital Signal Processor) [1]. This approach gives the
user several advantages including very high simulation speed, robustness
(iterative procedures and convergence problems are virtually avoided), and the
capability of simulating high complexity networks. DWS's performance
advantages are more and more evident as this complexity increases and will
further grow with the increase of computer's power.
To operate DWS correctly, a few issues have to be taken into account. These
issues will be briefly dealt with in the following.
1.2.1 Time Step
Being a DSP, DWS operation requires a fixed time step. This time step is defined
by the user in the .TRAN statement (see also Chapter 8), and its choice is very
important because it greatly affects both accuracy and simulation speed.
In any case, the Nyquist criterion has to be taken into account, so that the
simulation time step is strictly correlated with the bandwidth of the simulated
system and of its stimuli.
Another consideration affecting the time-step choice is related to the delays of
elements belonging to the simulated network. If no DELAYMETH option is
specified, all the delays are rounded to an integer multiple of time step, so that no
delay error occurs if each specified delay is an integer multiple of the chosen
step. When this situation is not verified, as in the case of small delay differences
between elements, due for instance to different mode propagation velocities in
coupled lines, it is suggested to use the DELAYMETH=INTERPOLATION
.option that operates some kind of interpolation in the delay evaluation, so that
the simulation error is reduced even if a very small time step isn't used.
Simulation error increases roughly with the square of the time step [2]. When in
doubt about the choice, it is suggested to run a reference simulation with a small
time step (e.g. 1/10 of the selected one) in order to compare the DWS's responses
with this reference and to have an evaluation of the simulation error.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
DWS General Features
Chapter 1 1-5
1.2.2 Elements
.
DWS's simulation engine maps each element and each node belonging to the
source netlist into a numerical equivalent which exchanges signals with the rest
of the network through its ports..
A port of an element is an internal DWS structure basically carrying the
following variables.:
A: port's incident voltage wave
B: port's reflected voltage wave
Z0: port's reference impedance
where the voltage is normally referenced to ground (node 0).
(0)
NA
B
V
I
Z0
A
B
wave representation
port N
electrical representation
Z0
Generic port N
electrical
network
digital
network
wave
At each element's port the following wave equations. apply:
V = A + B stating that the port voltage is the sum of the port's
incident and reflected voltage waves.
I = (A - B) / Z0 stating that the current entering the port is the
difference between the incident and reflected
voltage waves divided by the port's reference
impedance Z0.
The reference impedance of each port is determined by DWS during a setup
phase before the beginning of the real simulation run when the signals at each
port are calculated. If DWS cannot determine all the port reference impedances,
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
DWS General Features
Chapter 1 1-6
proper warning message will be issued so that the user will be able to enter some
more information (like the element's reference impedance) or to introduce in the
netlist some decoupling elements like unit delays..
DWS can deal with elements having more than two ports. Element ports cannot
be left open. An external resistor of practically infinite resistance (e.g. 1E9) can
be connected between the open port and ground.
In order to maintain SPICE compatibility, an element's port is normally identified
in the source netlist by a node identifier (integer number). The reference node 0
(ground) of the port is specified only if it is necessary to have SPICE
compatibility or to avoid misunderstanding.
Examples:
R1PORT 1 0 1K
specifies a 1k one-port resistor. The port
identifier is 1 corresponding to node 1. Here
the ground node 0 is specified to have
SPICE syntax compatibility.
R2PORT 1 2 10K
specifies a 10k two-port resistor. The port identifiers
are 1 and 2 corresponding to node 1 and node 2
respectively. Here the ground node 0 is NOT
specified to have SPICE syntax compatibility.
AS3PORT 1 2 3
specifies a three-port element (series
adaptor). The port identifiers are 1, 2 and 3
corresponding to node 1, node 2 and node
3 respectively. Here the ground node 0 is
NOT specified because SPICE
compatibility is not required (SPICE
doesn't allow the use of this kind of adaptors).
1
PORT1 R1PORT
1
PORT1
R2PORT
PORT2
2
1
PORT1 PORT2
2
3
PORT3
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
DWS General Features
Chapter 1 1-7
The two-port unbalanced transmission-line elements accept both SPICE-like
syntax where the node 0 is specified and the short syntax where it is not
specified. So:
T2PORT 1 2 Z0=50 TD=1NS (short DWS syntax)
or
T2PORT 1 0 2 0 Z0=50 TD=1NS (Spice-like syntax)
are the two ways allowed to describe the same transmission-line.
1
PORT1 PORT2
2
T2PORT
1.2.3 Two-Port Element Conversion
.
Before starting the simulation run, DWS converts some types of two-port
elements of the flattened netlist into one-port elements connected to the third port
of a series adaptor. This automatic conversion applies in particular for the
following two-port elements:
- Resistors (including nonlinear and controlled resistors)
- Capacitors
- Voltage sources (including controlled sources)
- Current sources (including controlled sources)
- Diodes
Moreover, DWS converts the balanced transmission lines of the flattened netlist
(four-port elements) into two-port transmission lines connected to the third port
of two series adaptors.
A similar conversion is applied to balanced ideal transformers.
For example, the two-port resistor of the source netlist:
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
DWS General Features
Chapter 1 1-8
R2PORT 1 2 10K
will be converted in the two following elements:
AS.R2PORT 1 2 3
R2PORT 3 0 10K
1 2
3
R2PORT
1
R2PORT
2
In particular for two-port capacitors this is equivalent to use by default the so
called "stub model" [2] which in turn means to apply the trapezoidal method of
integration.
By default the two-port inductance is NOT converted in this way. Instead a so
called "link-model" is used to deal with inductances [2]. In this way DWS by
default processes a two-port inductance as a unit-delay transmission line with
impedance Z0=L/TSTEP where TSTEP is the simulation time step. If the user
prefers the stub model (trapezoidal integration method), he can define the two-
port inductance in the source netlist file as a series adaptor with a one-port
inductance connected to its third port. For example, if the user specifies the
following statement:
L2PORT 1 2 1NH
DWS deals with the inductance as a unit-delay transmission line of
impedance Z0=1E-9/TSTEP; if he specifies instead the following statements:
ASL 1 2 3
L1PORT 3 0 1NH
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
DWS General Features
Chapter 1 1-9
DWS deals with the inductance using the trapezoidal method equivalent to a
shorted stub of Z0=2E-9/TSTEP and TD=TSTEP/2 connected between nodes 1
and 2.
1
L2PORT
2
1 2
"link" model
1 2
3
"stub" model
Z0=2L/TSTEP
TD=TSTEP/2
Z0=L/TSTEP
TD=TSTEP
default
trapezoidal
For the balanced transmission line, the automatic conversion is carried out for both its
balanced ports, as shown below:
TBAL 1 2 3 4 Z0=50 TD=1NS
1
2
3
4
is automatically converted in:
AS.TBAL 1 2 10
TBAL 10 0 20 0 Z0=50 TD=1NS
AS.TBAL 3 4 20
1
2
3
4
10 20
Ports 10 and 20 assume the meaning of balanced ports corresponding to the
couples of nodes 1,2 and 3,4 respectively.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
DWS General Features
Chapter 1 1-10
During the automatic two-port conversion, DWS also carries out a search for
parallel connections involving elements belonging to the types previously
mentioned. If two or more elements of these types are found to be connected in
parallel, this configuration will be automatically converted by means of a single
series adaptor, so that all the converted 1-port elements will be connected in
parallel at the third port of it.
Example:
R 1 2 100 R N 0 100
C 1 2 1NF AS.P.R 1 2 N
D 1 2 DMOD C N 0 1NF
D N 0 DMOD
1 2
1 2
R
C
D
N
R
C D
AS.P.R
The identifier of the series adaptor will be AS.P.elname (P means parallel) where
elname is the name of the element connected in the parallel block that first has
been descripted in the netlist.
1.2.4 Reference Impedance
.
As previously mentioned each element's port needs to have its reference
impedance defined by DWS before starting the simulation run. Some elements
like the piecewise-linear resistor or the diode require that the value of the
reference impedance are defined by the rest of the network connected to them. In
some cases, DWS is unable to determine Z0 due to a particular topology of the
network. This can happen, for instance, when two or more non-linear elements
are directly connected together. In this case DWS stops before starting the
simulation and issues a message identifying the problem and the location of the
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
DWS General Features
Chapter 1 1-11
involved elements. At this point the user can define Z0 directly in the nonlinear
element's statement or add unit-delay transmission lines to cut the direct
connection causing the problem. In both cases an element is added to the original
network and its additional effect vanishes decreasing the time step. In general
this additional effect is lower if the impedance is defined within the element's
statement.
1.2.5 Delay Discretization
Several DWS elements include an intrinsic delay whose value can be specified
by means of parameter TD. To perform the simulation, the input value will be
discretized on the basis of the selected simulation time step (TSTEP). No delay
error due to discretization will occur if all specified parameters TD are integer
multiple of simulation TSTEP.
Two delay discretization strategies are allowed depending on the DELAYMETH
option set by the user on the DWS input file:
- ROUNDING: this is also the default method if no DELAYMETH is
specified. If TD >_ 0.5 TSTEP the actual simulation delay
DTD (Discretized Time Delay) will be the nearest integer
multiple of the simulation timestep TSTEP, so that a
maximum error of 0.5 TSTEP will be caused by the delay
discretization.
- INTERPOLATION: if TD >_ 0.5 TSTEP the output of the actual delay block
will be obtained as linear interpolation between the outputs
generated by the two delays multiple of the time step
within which the given TD is comprised. This second kind
of approximation leads generally to an error lower than
pure rounding error.
In case the input parameter TD is set to a value < TSTEP including 0, the actual
discretized value for simulation will be set to TSTEP for both strategies.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
DWS General Features
Chapter 1 1-12
Y
N
Input
TD, TSTEP
TD < 0.5 TSTEP
DELAYMETH
DTD = n TSTEP
so that
| TD - DTD | < 0.5 TSTEP
*
rounding
DTD = TSTEP
linear interpolation between
the outputs On and On
corresponding to the nearest
integer multiples of time step
+1
interpolation
*
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
DWS General Features
Chapter 1 1-13
1.2.6 DWS Operation
Starting from the circuit description contained in the input file, DWS creates
sequentially three temporary files each generated from the previous one:
filename.t0: compressed netlist generated from the source netlist where each
statement is contained within a single line of text. The source lines
separated by the continuation character "+" at the beginning of the
line are joined together.
filename.t1: netlist after the subcircuit and chain expansion (flattened netlist).
filename.t2: netlist after the conversion of two-port elements into one-port
elements connected to a series adaptor. DWS simulates the circuit
as described in this temporary file. The report file is related to the
information carried by this netlist.
Syntax checks are performed at source netlist level. If a syntax violation is
detected, DWS stops and an error message containing the identifier of the
incorrect line is issued at the standard output, like:
Fatal Error : error message
On the basis of the network description contained in the flattened and converted
netlist (filename.t2), DWS builds up a node table where each node is classified
according to the number of connected element's ports.
If nodes connected to only one port (excluding control nodes) are detected, DWS
stops, and the following message will be issued at the standard output:
Fatal Error : floating node N in element elname
where N is the node with only one port and elname is the name of the element
connected to N. If floating control nodes of controlled elements are detected,
DWS stops, and the following message will be issued at the standard output:
Fatal Error : floating control node N
Upon the completion of node table and memory allocation procedure, DWS
starts a simulation scheduler which assigns the reference impedance to each
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
DWS General Features
Chapter 1 1-14
element port. If some port impedance cannot be assigned due to a particular
topology of the network, the problem is located and the following error message
is issued at the standard output:
Fatal Error : network topology not allowed due to element elname
At this point, the user can add decoupling elements in the source netlist as
previously described (see section 1.2.4). In this way the user has a complete
information about the actual network he is going to simulate.
Upon completion of the scheduling process a message is issued at the standard
output and the true simulation run can begin.
After a digital network setup phase during which the calculation parameters of
elements and nodes are set, as well as the user's initial conditions (if so specified
by the UIC parameter in the .TRAN statement), the simulation loop starts.
Due to the outstanding robustness of DWS's algorithms, a simulation allowed to
start will reach its end without incurring in troubles like convergence or
numerical problems, that typically affect other products. These considerations
apply as well in the most complex simulations involving a very large number of
elements, that other analog simulators based on conventional algorithms can't
afford.
At the begin of the simulation run a CIRCUIT SIMULATION STARTED
message is issued at the standard output. A message will be also issued during
the simulation loop upon completion of one tenth of the simulation time window
(TSTOP/10). The CPU time required by DWS to complete each tenth of the time
window is strictly constant, so that the user can easily evaluate the amount of
time that will be required to complete the run. At each loop, corresponding to a
TSTEP increment of time, the digital network status is updated. The outputs
regarding the signals specified by the user in the .TRAN statement are stored
starting from TSTART and ending with TSTOP which also stops the simulation
loop.
At this point DWS outputs regarding the user selected waveforms are stored in
the file identified as filename.g. If the user has specified an output time step (by
means of the .TRAN parameter LIMPTS) not coincident with TSTEP, the
filename.g will store waveform samples obtained performing a linear
interpolation on the calculated samples.
Upon simulation run completion, the CPU time information including Specific
Elapsed Time (SET, see also 1.6) will be printed out on the standard output.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
DWS General Features
Chapter 1 1-15
1.2.7 Memory Requirements
The maximum allowed network complexity (see also 1.6) that DWS can process
in a single run is determined by the amount of RAM space available.
Because each element and node type has different memory allocation
requirement, the maximum allowed net complexity also depends on the particular
element mix and on net topology. For a typical mix, each thousand of elements
requires about 1Mbyte of RAM space, so that a 8 Gbyte RAM personal computer
can roughly process 8 Million element nets (considering the memory used by the
system).
[1] Piero Belforte, Giancarlo Guaschino: “Electrical Simulation using digital
wave networks”, IASTED International Symposium, Paris June 1985.
[2] P.B.Johns,M.O'Brien:"Use of the transmission-line modeling (TLM) method
to solve nonlinear lumped networks", Radio & Electronic Eng., 1980, Vol.50,
No.1/2, pp.59-70.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
DWS General Features
Chapter 1 1-16
1.3 Circuit Description
DWS circuit description philosophy is derived from the standard simulator
SPICE. SPICE statement compatibility has been held as far as possible. In the
situations not dealt with by SPICE, DWS syntax is conceived as a superset of
SPICE syntax. The circuit to be analyzed is described to DWS by a set of
element statements, which define the circuit topology and element values, and a
set of control statements, which define the conditions of the simulation and the
simulation results the user wishes saved. Comments are statements which begin
with an asterisk "*" in column 1. They are for user documentation purposes only
and are ignored during simulation. Simulation control statements begin with a
dot "." in column 1. The last statement must be a .END statement. The order of
the remaining statements is arbitrary. Each element in the circuit is specified by
an element statement that contains the element name, the circuit nodes (port
identifiers, see also 1.2.2) to which the element is connected, and the values of
the parameters that determine the electrical characteristics of the element. The
first letter of the element name specifies the element type. The format for the
DWS element types is given in what follows. The strings XXXXXXX and
YYYYYYY denote arbitrary alphanumeric strings. For example, a resistor name
must begin with the letter R and can contain one or more characters. Hence, R,
R1, RS, ROUT, and R1TERM are valid resistor names.
Data fields that are enclosed in less than and greater than signs "< >" are
optional. All indicated punctuation (parentheses, equal signs, etc.) must be
specified.
Nodes names (port identifiers) must be positive integer numbers. The datum
(ground) node must be named "0". Every node must have at least two ports
except for control nodes. As mentioned in 1.2.4, the situations in which the
program cannot find the proper value for the reference impedance of an element
port are pinpointed and warning message containing involved element is issued.
In this case the user can insert an additional element, usually a unit-delay
transmission line, or specify the impedance within the element's statement.
Hierarchical circuit descriptions are possible through the use of subcircuits (see
also .SUBCKT statement) that operate exactly in the same way of SPICE.
An additional automatic description capability is offered by DWS by means of
chains (see also .CHAIN statement) allowing the user to build up a cascade
connection of whatever number of basic circuit cells defined in the same input
text.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
DWS General Features
Chapter 1 1-17
1.4 Input Format
The input format for DWS is of the free format type. Fields in a statement are
separated by one or more blanks, a comma, an equal "=" sign, or a left or right
parenthesis; extra spaces are ignored. A statement may be continued by entering
a + (plus) in column 1 of the following line; DWS continues reading beginning
with column 2.
A name field must begin with a letter (A through Z) and cannot contain any
delimiters.
A number field may be an integer field (12, -44), a floating point field (3.14159),
either an integer or floating point number followed by an integer exponent (1E-
14, 2.65E3), or either an integer or a floating point number followed by one of
the following scale factors:
T=1E12 G=1E9 MEG=1E6 K=1E3
M=1E-3 U=1E-6 N=1E-9 P=1E-12 F=1E-15
Letters immediately following a number that are not scale factors are ignored,
and letters immediately following a scale factor are ignored. Hence, 10, 10V,
10VOLTS, and 10HZ all represent the same number, and M, MA, MSEC, and
MMHOS all represent the same scale factor. Note that 1000, 1000.0, 1000HZ,
1E3, 1.0E3, 1KHZ, and 1K all represent the same number.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
DWS General Features
Chapter 1 1-18
1.5 Output File
The DWS outputs are stored in the file filename.g which has the following
structure:
FILE_NAME
NUMBER_OF_WAVEFORMS
NUMBER_OF_SAMPLES_PER_WAVEFORM
SAMPLING_TIMESTEP
<START_TIME>
WAVEFORM_NAME #1
LIST_OF_SAMPLES
.
.
.
WAVEFORM_NAME #N
LIST_OF_SAMPLES
<COMMENTS>
where:
FILE_NAME is the name of the file containing the simulated waveform(s)
(filename.g).
NUMBER_OF_WAVEFORMS is the number of waveforms included in the
file specified by FILE_NAME. NUMBER_OF_WAVEFORMS is a nonzero
unsigned integer.
NUMBER_OF_SAMPLES is the number of samples of each waveform
included in the file specified by FILE_NAME. NUMBER_OF_SAMPLES is the
same for each waveform belonging to this file.
SAMPLING_TIMESTEP is the time between two contiguous samples of each
stored waveform expressed in seconds. The samples are stored at fixed time step.
SAMPLING_TIMESTEP applies to all the waveforms included in the file and
depends on the TSTEP and LIMPTS values specified within the .TRAN
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
DWS General Features
Chapter 1 1-19
statement of DWS. If LIMPTS is greater than (TSTOP-TSTART)/TSTEP, the
number of stored samples per waveform is limited to (TSTOP-TSTART)/TSTEP
and SAMPLING_TIMESTEP is equal to TSTEP.
If LIMPTS is smaller than (TSTOP-TSTART)/TSTEP, the stored output samples
are obtained by linear interpolation of the simulated values and
SAMPLING_TIMESTEP is equal to (TSTOP-TSTART)/LIMPTS. If LIMPTS is
omitted, SAMPLING_TIMESTEP is equal to TSTEP.
Usually the time is assumed as independent variable and all the waveforms are
given versus time. When necessary, sampling time step can be used with the
meaning of sample identifier. In this last case one of the waveforms can be
assumed as independent variable.
START_TIME is the time expressed in seconds at which DWS begins to save
the results of the simulation and applies to all the waveforms included in the
same file. START_TIME corresponds to TSTART specified within the .TRAN
statement. If START_TIME is not specified, it is assumed to be 0.
WAVEFORM_NAME is the identifier of the waveform specifying the variable
type (voltage, current, etc.) and the node or port (element and node) identifier to
which the waveform is related. The following WAVEFORM_NAME types are
available:
V(N) : voltage at node (port) N referenced to ground (node 0)
V(N1,N2) : voltage at node (port) N1 referenced to node (port) N2
I(ELEM,N) : input current at port N of element ELEM
P(ELEM,N) : instantaneous input power at port N of element ELEM
A(ELEM,N) : incident voltage wave at port N of element ELEM
B(ELEM,N) : reflected voltage wave at port N of element ELEM
Y(ELEM,N) : reference admittance of port N of element ELEM
Z(ELEM,N) : reference impedance of port N of element ELEM
(Z=1/Y)
Q(ELEM,N) : incident instantaneous power at port N of element ELEM
R(ELEM,N) : reflected instantaneous power at port N of element
ELEM
G(ELEM,N) : B/A wave ratio at port N of element ELEM
where the node/element identifiers are those specified in .TRAN statement.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
DWS General Features
Chapter 1 1-20
LIST_OF_SAMPLE is the list of samples of the waveform specified by
WAVEFORM_NAME. Each sample is given in exponential notation.
The user can add COMMENT in the DWS's output file after the last list of
samples. Each comment line must have an asterisk "*" as first character of the
line.
The DWS's output file format can be also used to describe directly the behavior
of independent sources, the dynamic transfer function of controlled elements and
scattering-parameter elements.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
DWS General Features
Chapter 1 1-21
1.6 Report File
The report file obtained with the -r option of DWS command is a summary of the
most important features of the simulation including:
- SIMULATION PARAMETERS specified by the user including temperature,
simulation time step and time window.
- NETWORK ELEMENT SUMMARY which classifies the expanded network
derived from the DWS input netlist. For each element type the number of
elements contained in the flattened input netlist (filename.t2) is reported
giving also the total number of elements (En.) and the total number of nodes
(Nn.). The sum of En and Nn is assumed to be an index of the complexity of
the network.
- OUTPUT VARIABLE SUMMARY. that lists all output waveforms (node
voltages, branch currents, waves at the element's ports, instantaneous powers,
etc.) specified in the .TRAN statement and saved in the graphic output file
(filename.g). The number of stored samples per waveform is also specified.
- SIMULATION STATISTICS SUMMARY. giving some figures related to
the complexity. of the simulation to be carried out. This complexity is
evaluated by means of a Complexity Factor (Cf.) defined as the product of
Network Complexity and the number of Calculated Time-Points.
- JOB STATISTICS SUMMARY giving the actual CPU time required for the
simulation run and shared into user and system components. DWS's execution
time is roughly proportional to the Complexity Factor multiplied by the
Specific Elapsed Time (SET.). The SET is defined as the ratio between the
actual Elapsed Time and Cf. SET only depends on the mix of elements
contained in the network and on the computer's power so that simulation time
growth is strictly linear versus the complexity of the network.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
DWS General Features
Chapter 1 1-22
1.7 Starting DWS
.
Before starting, make sure to have a user-account set up to run DWS. To start
DWS, enter the command:
DWS [-rs] filename
where the options and the arguments have the following meaning:
filename: name of the file containing the source netlist (max allowed length:
100 characters).
-r (report):. information related to running simulation, including circuit
statistics (number and type of elements/nodes of the circuit) and
execution times, is saved in a report file filename.r
-s (silent)..: no output message about the running simulation is issued (useful
in batch mode).
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-1
Chapter 2
P a s s i v e E l e m e n t s .
2. 2
2.1 Linear Resistors
2.2 Piece-Wise Linear Resistors
2.3 Time-Controlled Linear Resistors
2.3.1 DC Resistor Function
2.3.2 Pulse Resistor Function
2.3.3 PulsePoly Resistor Function
2.3.4 PulseErfc Resistor Function
2.3.5 Erfc Resistor Function
2.3.6 Delta Resistor Function
2.3.7 Sinusoidal Resistor Function
2.3.8 Piece-Wise Linear Resistor Function
2.3.9 PulsePwl Resistor Function
2.3.10 File Resistor Function
2.3.11 PulseFile Resistor Function
2.4 Voltage-Controlled Resistors
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-2
2.5 Current-Controlled Resistors
2.6 Static Transfer Function for Voltage or Current Controlled Resistors
2.6.1 Linear Static Transfer Function
2.6.2 Piece-Wise Linear Static Transfer Function
2.6.3 File Static Transfer Function
2.6.4 Threshold Static Transfer Function
2.6.5 Hysteresis Static Transfer Function
2.7 Dynamic Transfer Function for Voltage or Current Controlled Resistors
2.7.1 Unit-step Dynamic Response
2.7.2 S-plane Dynamic Transfer Function
2.7.3 Z-plane Dynamic Transfer Function
2.8 Linear Capacitors
2.9 Linear Inductors
2.10 Unbalanced Transmission Lines
2.11 Balanced Transmission Lines
2.12 Unit-Delay Transmission Lines
2.13 Ideal Transformers
2.14 Junction Diodes
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-3
2.1 Linear Resistors
.
N1 N2
General form:
RXXXXXXX N1 N2 value
Examples:
R1 1 0 1K
RS 15 22 50
N1 and N2 are the two element nodes. Value is the resistance (in ohms) and may be
positive (1/GMAX  value  1/GMIN) or negative (-1/GMIN  value  -
1/GMAX). If the parameter value is set to zero, the default value 1/GMAX will be
assumed (see the .OPTIONS statement).
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-4
2.2 Piece-Wise Linear Resistors
..
N -N +
General form:
PXXXXXXX N+ N- V1 I1 V2 I2 <V3 I3 ... <V200 I200>>
PXXXXXXX N+ N- V1 I1 V2 I2 <V3 I3 ... <V200 I200>> Z0=value
PXXXXXXX N+ N- V1 I1 V2 I2 <V3 I3 ... <V200 I200>> C=value
PXXXXXXX N+ N- V1 I1 V2 I2 <V3 I3 ... <V200 I200>> L=value
Examples:
P1 1 0 -1 -.01 0 0 1 .1 Z0=50
PRDR 10 20 0 0 .6 6UA .8 .5MA .85 2.5MA .9 10MA
N+ and N- are the positive and negative element nodes, respectively. The
nonlinear resistance. is described by pairs of values Vi,Ii (Fig.2.2.1). The number
of pairs (n) must be 2 n 200. For V < V1 the resistance keeps the value related
to V1 < V < V2. For V > Vn the resistance keeps the value related to Vn-1 < V <
Vn. The pairs must be written in order of increasing voltage values (Vi  Vi+1).
V
I
1
2
3
4
(V
1
, I
1
)
(V
2
, I
2
)
(V
3
, I
3
)
(V
4
, I
4
)
N-N+I
V
Fig.2.2.1 Voltage-current relationship for a 2-port PWL resistor.
If the optional parameters Z0, C or L are not given, the reference impedance at
the N+ and N- ports will automatically be set by the circuit elements connected
to the Piece-Wise Linear Resistor. If, due to network topology, the port reference
impedance cannot be defined, one of the three optional parameters must be
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-5
specified. In this way an additional transmission line with a delay of TSTEP/2,
connected at the intrinsic Piece-Wise Linear Resistor, decouples it from the other
elements of the network.
intrinsic
PWL resistor
TD=TSTEP/2
Z0
N+
N-
N+
N-
C
N+
N-
L/2
L/2
Fig.2.2.2: Electrical equivalents of two-port PWL resistor when additional
parameters Z0, C, L are specified for decoupling..
The characteristic impedance of this line may be expressed in one of three forms:
directly as impedance Z0 (ohms), as capacitance C (Farads), so Z0 is set to
TSTEP/(2*C), or as inductance L (Henries), so Z0 is set to 2*L/TSTEP. If the
Piece-Wise Linear Resistor is described as two-port element (i.e. neither N+ nor
N- is ground node), the additional line is a true or capacitive or inductive
balanced transmission line (Fig.2.2.2); if the Piece-Wise Linear Resistor is
described as one-port element (i.e. either N+ or N- is ground node), the
additional line is a true or capacitive or inductive unbalanced transmission line
(Fig.2.2.3).
An alternative method is to use a Unit-Delay Transmission Line for decoupling.
purposes, but in this case an additional line with a delay of TSTEP is introduced
in the network, leading to a transient effect greater than that due to the internal
Z0 setting.
N
N
N
TD
Z0
L
TSTEP
2
=
intrinsic
PWL resistor
C
Fig.2.2.3: Electrical equivalents of one-port PWL resistor when additional
parameters Z0, C, L are specified for decoupling.
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-6
2.3 Time-Controlled Linear Resistors
.
N1 N2
t
General form:
RXXXXXXX N1 N2 rsource
RXXXXXXX N1 N2 rsource Z0=value
RXXXXXXX N1 N2 rsource C=value
RXXXXXXX N1 N2 rsource L=value
N1 and N2 are the two element nodes. rsource is the time-controlled resistor
function. Resistance value may be positive or negative, but not zero. If positive
resistance value becomes < 1/GMAX, the default value 1/GMAX will be
automatically set; if negative resistance value becomes > -1/GMAX, the
default value -1/GMAX will be automatically set (see the .OPTIONS statement).
Eleven control functions are available: DC, Pulse, PulsePoly, PulseErfc, Erfc,
Delta, Sinusoidal, Piece-Wise Linear, PulsePwl, File and PulseFile. The Pulse,
Piece-Wise Linear and Sinusoidal functions have the same syntax and meaning
of corresponding functions used in SPICE for time-dependent sources. The
PulsePoly, PulseErfc, PulsePwl, PulseFile functions are extensions of the Pulse
function where the behavior of pulse edges can be expressed in several ways
including polynomial, piece-wise linear and generic behaviors described in a
DWS output file.
If one of the three optional parameters Z0, C or L is specified, an additional
transmission line with a delay of TSTEP/2, connected at the intrinsic Time-
Controlled Linear Resistor, decouples it from the other elements of the network.
In this way, if delay-free circuit elements are connected to the Time-Controlled
Linear Resistor, the reference impedance at their ports doesn't have to be
calculated at each simulation step, speeding up the run time.
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-7
intrinsic
TCL resistor
TD=TSTEP/2
Z0
N1
N2
N1
N2
C
N1
N2
L/2
L/2
Fig.2.3.1: Electrical equivalents of two-port TCL resistor when additional
parameters Z0, C, L are specified for decoupling.
The characteristic impedance of this line may be expressed in one of three forms:
directly as impedance Z0 (ohms), as capacitance C (Farads), so Z0 is set to
TSTEP/(2*C), or as inductance L (Henries), so Z0 is set to 2*L/TSTEP. If the
Time-Controlled Linear Resistor is described as two-port element (i.e. neither N1
nor N2 is ground node), the additional line is a true or capacitive or inductive
balanced transmission line (Fig.2.3.1); if the Time-Controlled Linear Resistor is
described as one-port element (i.e. either N1 or N2 is ground node), the
additional line is a true or capacitive or inductive unbalanced transmission line
(Fig.2.3.2).
An alternative method is to use a Unit-Delay Transmission Line for decoupling.
purposes, but in this case an additional line with a delay of TSTEP is introduced
in the network, leading to a transient effect greater than that due to the internal
Z0 setting.
N
N
N
TD
Z0
L
TSTEP
2
=
intrinsic
TCL resistor
C
Fig.2.3.2: Electrical equivalents of one-port TCL resistor when additional
parameters Z0, C, L are specified for decoupling.
User note:
Time-Controlled Linear Resistors can be utilized to implement time-dependent
switches. Their use doesn't cause any numerical problem to DWS if Time-
Controlled Linear Resistors are not connected to Delay-Free Loops (DFLs). This
connection could cause problems in particular situations, especially if the
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-8
dynamic range of resistance values is very large. In these cases (automatically
identified by DWS) the user can decouple the Time-Controlled Linear Resistor
from DFL defining the reference impedance in the element's statement or cut the
DFL by means of additional Unit-Delay Transmission Lines inserted in the
network.
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-9
2.3.1 DC Resistor Function
.
Syntax: DC <(>RDC<)>
RDC
t
Example:
RIN 4 0 DC( 50 )
The resistor value is time-invariant. The value may optionally be enclosed by
round brackets. The previous statement is completely equivalent to :
RIN 4 0 50
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-10
2.3.2 Pulse Resistor Function
.
Syntax: PULSE( R1 R2 <TD <TR <TF <PW <PER>>>>> )
R1
R2
0
TD TR PW
PER
TF t
Example:
RIN 4 0 PULSE( 1E6 1E-6 5NS 1NS 1NS 24NS 50NS )
parameters default values units
R1 (initial value) ohms
R2 (pulsed value) ohms
TD (delay time) 0.0 seconds
TR (rise time) TSTEP seconds
TF (fall time) TSTEP seconds
PW (pulse width) TSTOP seconds
PER(period) TSTOP seconds
A single pulse so specified is described by the following breakpoint table:
time value
0 R1
TD R1
TD+TR R2
TD+TR+PW R2
TD+TR+PW+TF R1
TSTOP R1
Intermediate points are determined by linear interpolation.
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-11
2.3.3 PulsePoly Resistor Function
.
Syntax: PULSE( R1 R2 <TD <TR <TF <PW <PER>>>>> )
POLY( C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 )
R1
R2
0
TD TR PW
PER
TF t
Example:
RIN 4 0 PULSE( 1E6 1E-6 5NS 1NS 1NS 24NS 50NS )
POLY( 0 .13 -.3.24 23.45 -36.62 21.17 -3.89 )
This function is an extension of the basic Pulse function, when rise and fall edge
behaviors are not linear but can be fitted by a higher-degree polynomial.
The meaning and the default values of PulsePoly parameters are like those of the
corresponding parameters of Pulse, unless edge shape is described by a 6-degree
polynomial in PulsePoly source. C0, C1, ... C6 are the coefficients of the
polynomial. The polynomial is defined between 0 and 1 and, at the lower and
upper limits of this range, must assume the values 0 and 1 respectively in order
that the actual edge shape will reflect the polynomial shape. The polynomial
definition window will be automatically scaled to the actual windows TR, R1, R2,
and TF, R2, R1 (fig.2.3.3.1).

BASIC POLY DEFINITION WINDOW
0
1
0
1
RISE-EDGE WINDOW
R1
R2
TR
FALL-EDGE WINDOW
R1
R2
TF
t
POLY(t) POLY(t)=
6
n=0
Cn tn
=1
n=0
6
Cn
Fig.2.3.3.1: Mapping of basic poly definition window into rise and fall windows.
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-12
2.3.4 PulseErfc Resistor Function
.
Syntax: PULSE( R1 R2 <TD <TR <TF <PW <PER>>>>> ) ERFC
R1
R2
0
TD TR PW
PER
TF t
Example:
RIN 4 0 PULSE(1E6 1E-6 5NS 1NS 1NS 24NS 50NS ) ERFC
This function is an extension of the basic Pulse function when rise and fall edges
can be fitted by a complementary error function (erfc) behavior. The meaning
and the default values of PulseErfc parameters are like those of the
corresponding parameters of Pulse, unless edge shape is that of erfc. The
definition window of erfc will be automatically scaled to the rise and fall edge
windows (fig.2.3.4.1).
BASIC ERFC DEFINITION WINDOW
0
1
0
1
RISE-EDGE WINDOW
R1
R2
TR
FALL-EDGE WINDOW
R1
R2
TF
t
erfc
Fig.2.3.4.1: Mapping of basic erfc definition window into rise and fall windows.
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-13
2.3.5 Erfc Resistor Function
.
Syntax: ERFC( R1 R2 TD TR )
R1
R2
0
TD TR t
Example:
RIN 4 0 ERFC(1E6 1E-6 5NS 1NS )
parameters units
R1 (initial value) ohms
R2 (final value) ohms
TD (delay time) seconds
TR (rise time) seconds
The shape of the waveform is described by the following table:
time value
0 to TD R1
TD+TR to TSTOP R2
from TD to TD+TR the edge shape is like the shape of erfc function.
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-14
2.3.6 Delta Resistor Function
.
Syntax: DELTA( <R <TD>> )
R
0
TD t
Example:
RIN 4 0 DELTA( 1E6 5NS )
parameters default values units
R (impulse value) 1 ohms
TD (delay time) 0.0 seconds
This function implements a delayed Dirac's pulse behavior in according to the
following table.
time value
0 to TD- 0
TD R
TD+ to TSTOP 0
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-15
2.3.7 Sinusoidal Resistor Function
.
Syntax: SIN( RO RA <FREQ <TD <THETA>>> )
0
TD
R0
RA
1/ FREQ
THETA
t
Example:
RIN 4 0 SIN( 1E3 1E3 100MEG 5NS 10MEG )
parameters default values units
RO (offset) ohms
RA (amplitude) ohms
FREQ (frequency) 1/TSTOP Hz
TD (delay) 0.0 seconds
THETA (damping factor) 0.0 1/seconds
This function implements an exponentially decaying sinusoidal behavior
described by the following table:
time value
0 to TD R0
TD to TSTOP RO + RA*exp(-(t-TD)*THETA)*sin(2*FREQ*(t-TD))
The syntax is derived from SPICE sinusoidal source.
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-16
2.3.8 Piece-Wise Linear Resistor Function
.
Syntax: PWL( T1 R1 T2 R2 <T3 R3 <T4 R4 ... <T199 R199
<T200 R200>>>> )
0
tT1 T2 T3 T4 T5
R1
R2
R3
R4 R5
Example:
RIN 4 0 PWL( 10NS 1E6 11NS 1E-6 15NS 1E-6 16NS 1E6 )
This function implements a piece-wise linear behavior containing up to 200
breakpoints. Each breakpoint is defined by a pair of values (Ti, Ri) that specifies
the resistance Ri (in ohms) of the time-controlled resistor at time=Ti (in
seconds). The number of pairs (n) must be 2 n 200. The value of the
resistance at intermediate values of time is determined by using linear
interpolation on the input values. For time < T1 the value of the resistance is R1,
for time > Tn the value of the resistance is Rn. The pairs must be written in order
of increasing time values (Ti  Ti+1), otherwise a specific error message is
issued on the standard output.
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-17
2.3.9 PulsePwl Resistor Function
.
Syntax: PULSE( R1 R2 <TD <TR <TF <PW <PER>>>>> ) PWL( T1 Y1
T2 Y2 <T3 Y3 <T4 Y4 ... <T199 Y199 <T200 Y200>>>> )
R1
R2
0
TD TR PW
PER
TF t
tT1 T2 T3 T4 T5 Tn
Y1
Y2 Y3
Y4
Y5
Yn
Example:
RIN 4 0 PULSE(1E6 1E-6 5NS 2NS 2NS 23NS 50NS ) PWL( 0 1E6
.3NS 1E3 .6NS 100 1NS 10 1.4NS 1E-2 2NS 1E-6 )
This function is an extension of the basic Pulse function when rise and fall edges
can be fitted by a piece-wise linear behavior. The meaning and the default values
of PulsePwl parameters are like those of the corresponding parameters of Pulse,
unless edge shape is described by the pairs of values Ti, Yi in PulsePwl resistor.
The pairs, written in order of increasing time values (Ti  Ti+1), determine edge
shape, while the actual value of the resistance is defined by the parameters R1,
R2, TR, TF. The PWL definition window will be automatically scaled to the
actual rise and fall edge windows. The piece-wise linear swing Yn - Y1 (n:
number of pairs) will become the pulse swing R2 - R1, the time interval Tn - T1
will become TR for the rise edge and TF for the fall edge as explained in
section 2.3.4.
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-18
2.3.10 File Resistor Function
.
Syntax: FILE( filename )
R1R0
0 t
R2
R3
Rn
T 2T 3T nT
Example:
RIN 4 0 FILE(ressamples )
This function implements a time-controlled resistor whose behavior is described
by a DWS-format file identified by the parameter filename. In this file a
sampling timestep (T) will be specified. If the simulation timestep (TSTEP in
.TRAN statement) is not coincident with the file timestep, the resistance values
will be determined using linear interpolation of the values contained in the file.
After the last sample contained in the file, the resistance value is assumed to be
equal to the value of the last sample. File name must begin with a letter. Strings
beginning with 'DC' or 'dc' are invalid file names since these strings are
interpreted as the DC parameter of an independent source.
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-19
2.3.11 PulseFile Resistor Function
.
Syntax: PULSE( NC NC <TD <NC <NC <PW <PER>>>>> )
FILE(filename)
0
TD PW
PER
t
t0
Y1
Y0
n*T
Yn
T 2T
Y2
Example:
RIN 4 0 PULSE( 0 0 5NS 0 0 23NS 50NS ) FILE(ressamples )
This function is an extension of the basic Pulse function when rise and fall edges
can be described by a behavior contained in a DWS-format file identified by the
parameter filename. File name must begin with a letter. Strings beginning with
'DC' or 'dc' are invalid file names.
The meaning and the default values of the parameters TD, PW and PER are like
those of the corresponding parameters of Pulse, whereas initial value, pulsed
value, rise time, fall time and edge shape are determined by resistance samples
versus time contained in the file. For this reason the initial, pulsed, rise time and
fall time values specified in the PULSE syntax will be not considered.
parameter value
R1 Y0 (1st file sample)
R2 Yn (last file sample)
TR n*T
TF n*T
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-20
If the simulation timestep (TSTEP in .TRAN statement) is not coincident with
the file timestep, the resistance values will be determined using linear
interpolation of the values contained in the file.
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-21
2.4 Voltage-Controlled Resistors
.
-
NC+
NC-
DELAY
D.T.F. S.T.F.
Dynamic
Transfer
Function
Static
Transfer
Function
Control Link Chain
VCR
N1
N2
General form
RXXXXXXX N1 N2 NC+ NC- STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION
<DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> <TD>
RXXXXXXX N1 N2 NC+ NC- STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION
<DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> <TD> Z0=value
RXXXXXXX N1 N2 NC+ NC- STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION
<DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> <TD> C=value
RXXXXXXX N1 N2 NC+ NC- STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION
<DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> <TD> L=value
-
NC+
NC-
DELAY
D.T.F.S.T.F.
Dynamic
Transfer
Function
Static
Transfer
Function
Control Link Chain
VCR
N1
N2
General form
RXXXXXXX N1 N2 NC+ NC- <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION>
STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <TD>
RXXXXXXX N1 N2 NC+ NC- <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION>
STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <TD> Z0=value
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-22
RXXXXXXX N1 N2 NC+ NC- <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION>
STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <TD> C=value
RXXXXXXX N1 N2 NC+ NC- <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION>
STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <TD> L=value
This form is an extension of the syntax used in SPICE for voltage-controlled
sources. N1 and N2 are the two element nodes. NC+ and NC- are the
positive and negative controlling nodes, respectively. The controlling signal is
V(NC+) - V(NC-). Like the other voltage and current controlled elements, the
Voltage-Controlled Resistors can have two types of control link chain with
different positions of the transfer functions. The static transfer function must be
specified, while the dynamic transfer function is optional.
The optional parameter TD is a delay time expressed in seconds. The Delay
operator is the first block of the control link chain and acts on the controlling
signal. The minimum delay is corresponding to TSTEP (specified in the .TRAN
statement) even if the input parameter TD is omitted or set to a value < TSTEP.
This approximation can be considered when zero-delay control links are
simulated. Regarding the delay discretization process, both ROUNDING and
INTERPOLATION methods described in 1.2.5 are allowed depending on the
DELAYMETH option set by the user on the DWS input file.
Resistance value may be positive or negative, but not zero. If positive resistance
value becomes < 1/GMAX, the default value 1/GMAX will be automatically set;
if negative resistance value becomes > -1/GMAX, the default value -1/GMAX
will be automatically set (see the .OPTIONS statement).
If one of the three optional parameters Z0, C or L is specified, an additional
transmission line with a delay of TSTEP/2, connected at the intrinsic Voltage-
Controlled Resistor, decouples it from the other elements of the network. In this
way, if delay-free circuit elements are connected to the Voltage-Controlled
Resistor, the reference impedance at their ports doesn't have to be calculated at
each simulation step, speeding up the run time.
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-23
N1
N2
L/2
L/2
intrinsic
VCR
TD=TSTEP/2
Z0
N1
N2
NC+
NC-
N1
N2
C
NC+
NC-
NC+
NC-
Fig.2.4.1: Electrical equivalents of two-port VCR when additional parameters
Z0, C, L are specified for decoupling.
The characteristic impedance of this line may be expressed in one of three forms:
directly as impedance Z0 (ohms), as capacitance C (Farads), so Z0 is set to
TSTEP/(2*C), or as inductance L (Henries), so Z0 is set to 2*L/TSTEP. If the
Voltage-Controlled Resistor is described as two-port element (i.e. neither N1 nor
N2 is ground node), the additional line is a true or capacitive or inductive
balanced transmission line (Fig.2.4.1); if the Voltage-Controlled Resistor is
described as one-port element (i.e. either N1 or N2 is ground node), the
additional line is a true or capacitive or inductive unbalanced transmission line
(Fig.2.4.2).
An alternative method is to use a Unit-Delay Transmission Line for decoupling.
purposes, but in this case an additional line with a delay of TSTEP is introduced
in the network, leading to a transient effect greater than that due to the internal
Z0 setting.
N
N
N
TD
Z0
L
TSTEP
2
=
intrinsic
VCR
C
NC+
NC-
NC+
NC-
NC+
NC-
Fig.2.4.2: Electrical equivalents of one-port VCR when additional
parameters Z0, C, L are specified for decoupling.
Use note:
the Voltage-Controlled Resistors (VCR) can be utilized to implement controlled
switches that in turn can model logic functionality. The use of VCR doesn't cause
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-24
any numerical problem to DWS if VCRs are not connected to Delay-Free Loops
(DFLs). This connection could cause some solution problems in particular
situations especially if the dynamic range of resistance values is very large. In
these cases (automatically identified by DWS) the user can decouple the VCR
from DFL defining the reference impedance in the element's statement or cut the
DFL by means of additional Unit-Delay Transmission Lines inserted in the
network.
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-25
2.5 Current-Controlled Resistors
.
DELAY
D.T.F. S.T.F.
Dynamic
Transfer
Function
Static
Transfer
Function
Control Link Chain
CCR
N1
N2
N
I
ELEM
C
General form:
RXXXXXXX N1 N2 I(ELEM,NC) STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION
<DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> <TD>
RXXXXXXX N1 N2 I(ELEM,NC) STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION
<DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> <TD> Z0=value
RXXXXXXX N1 N2 I(ELEM,NC) STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION
<DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> <TD> C=value
RXXXXXXX N1 N2 I(ELEM,NC) STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION
<DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> <TD> L=value
DELAY
D.T.F.S.T.F.
Dynamic
Transfer
Function
Static
Transfer
Function
Control Link Chain
CCR
N1
N2
N
I
ELEM
C
General form:
RXXXXXXX N1 N2 I(ELEM,NC) <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION>
STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <TD>
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-26
RXXXXXXX N1 N2 I(ELEM,NC) <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION>
STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <TD> Z0=value
RXXXXXXX N1 N2 I(ELEM,NC) <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION>
STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <TD> C=value
RXXXXXXX N1 N2 I(ELEM,NC) <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION>
STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <TD> L=value
This form is an extension of the syntax used in SPICE for current-controlled
sources. N1 and N2 are the two element nodes. The controlling current
I(ELEM,NC) is the current which enters the port of the element ELEM connected
to the node NC. Like the other voltage and current elements, the Current-
Controlled Resistors can have two types of control link chain with different
positions of the transfer functions. The static transfer function must be specified,
while the dynamic transfer function is optional.
The optional parameter TD is a delay time expressed in seconds. The Delay
operator is the first block of the control link chain and acts on the controlling
signal. The minimum delay is corresponding to TSTEP (specified in the .TRAN
statement) even if the input parameter TD is omitted or set to a value < TSTEP.
This approximation can be considered when zero-delay control links are
simulated. Regarding the delay discretization process, both ROUNDING and
INTERPOLATION methods described in 1.2.5 are allowed depending on the
DELAYMETH option set by the user on the DWS input file.
Resistance value may be positive or negative, but not zero. If positive resistance
value becomes < 1/GMAX, the default value 1/GMAX will be automatically set;
if negative resistance value becomes > -1/GMAX, the default value -1/GMAX
will be automatically set (see the .OPTIONS statement).
If one of the three optional parameters Z0, C or L is specified, an additional
transmission line with a delay of TSTEP/2, connected at the intrinsic Current-
Controlled Resistor, decouples it from the other elements of the network. In this
way, if delay-free circuit elements are connected to the Current-Controlled
Resistor, the reference impedance at their ports doesn't have to be calculated at
each simulation step, speeding up the run time.
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-27
N1
N2
L/2
L/2
intrinsic
TD=TSTEP/2
Z0
N1
N2
N1
N2
C
I II
CCR
Fig.2.5.1: Electrical equivalents of two-port CCR when additional parameters
Z0, C, L are specified for decoupling.
The characteristic impedance of this line may be expressed in one of three forms:
directly as impedance Z0 (ohms), as capacitance C (Farads), so Z0 is set to
TSTEP/(2*C), or as inductance L (Henries), so Z0 is set to 2*L/TSTEP. If the
Current-Controlled Resistor is described as two-port element (i.e. neither N1 nor
N2 is ground node), the additional line is a true or capacitive or inductive
balanced transmission line (Fig.2.5.1); if the Current-Controlled Resistor is
described as one-port element (i.e. either N1 or N2 is ground node), the
additional line is a true or capacitive or inductive unbalanced transmission line
(Fig.2.5.2).
An alternative method is to use a Unit-Delay Transmission Line for decoupling.
purposes, but in this case an additional line with a delay of TSTEP is introduced
in the network, leading to a transient effect greater than that due to the internal
Z0 setting.
N
N
N
TD
Z0
L
TSTEP
2
=
intrinsic
C
I I I
CCR
Fig.2.5.2: Electrical equivalents of one-port CCR when additional
parameters Z0, C, L are specified for decoupling.
Use note:
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-28
the Current-Controlled Resistors (CCR) can be utilized to implement controlled
switches that in turn can model logic functionality. The use of CCR doesn't cause
any numerical problem to DWS if CCRs are not connected to Delay-Free Loops
(DFLs). This connection could cause some solution problems in particular
situations especially if the dynamic range of resistance values is very large. In
these cases (automatically identified by DWS) the user can decouple the CCR
from DFL defining the reference impedance in the element's statement or cut the
DFL by means of additional Unit-Delay Transmission Lines inserted in the
network.
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-29
2.6 Static Transfer Functions for Voltage or Current-Controlled
Resistors
.
The input signal of static transfer function (controlling signal) is a voltage
(expressed in Volts) for Voltage-Controlled Resistors or a current (expressed
in Amps) for Current-Controlled Resistors. The output signal of static transfer
function is a resistance (expressed in ohms).
Five static transfer functions are available: Linear, Piece-Wise Linear, File,
Threshold and Hysteresis. If parameters are omitted, the default values shown
will be assumed.
2.6.1 Linear Static Transfer Function
.
Syntax: value
R
V (V) for VCR
I (A) for CCR

Examples:
R1 4 0 10 20 5
R1 4 0 I(R2,10) 5
value is the transfer ratio expressed in ohms/Volt (A-1) for VCR or ohms/Amp for
CCR.
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-30
2.6.2 Piece-Wise Linear Static Transfer Function
.
Syntax: PWL( X1 R1 X2 R2 <X3 R3 <X4 R4 ... <X199 R199
<X200 R200>>>> )
X1 X2
X3 X4 X5
R1
R2
R3 R4
R5

V (V) for VCR
I (A) for CCR
R
Examples:
RV1 4 0 10 20 PWL( -1 10 0 10 0 100 1 100 )
RI2 4 0 I(R2,10) PWL( -10MA 10 0 10 0 100 10MA 100 )
This function implements a PieceWise Linear (PWL) behavior containing up to
200 breakpoints. Each breakpoint is defined by a pair of values (Vi,Ri) for VCR
and (Ii,Ri) for CCR. Each pair of values (Xi, Ri) specifies that resistance value is
Ri (in ohms) at controlling signal = Xi. The number of pairs (n) must be
2n200. Resistance value at intermediate values of controlling signal is
determined by using linear interpolation on the input values.
For controlling signal < X1 the static transfer function keeps the slope related to
the first interval X1 X2, for controlling signal > Xn the static transfer function
keeps the slope related to the last interval Xn-1 Xn. The pairs must be written in
order of increasing controlling signal values (Xi  Xi+1) otherwise an error
message is issued.
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-31
2.6.3 File Static Transfer Function
.
Syntax: FILE( filename )
R1
R0
0
R2
R3
Rn
X 2X 3X nX

V (V) for VCR
I (A) for CCR
R
Examples:
RV1 4 0 10 20 FILE( stfsamples )
RI2 4 0 I(R2,10) FILE( stfsamples )
This function implements a static transfer behavior described by a DWS-format
file identified by the parameter filename. In this file the sampling timestep value
is assumed to be the independent variable step (V for VCR and I for CCR).
Resistance value at intermediate values of controlling signal is determined by
using linear interpolation.
For controlling signal < controlling signal of the first sample the static transfer
function keeps the slope related to the interval between the first two samples, for
controlling signal > controlling signal of the last sample the static transfer
function keeps the slope related to the interval between the last two samples.
File name must begin with a letter. Strings beginning with 'DC' or 'dc' are invalid
file names since these strings are interpreted as the DC parameter of an
independent source.
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-32
2.6.4 Threshold Static Transfer Function
.
Syntax:THR( <XT <R1 <R2>>> )
R2
V (V) for VCR
I (A) for CCR

R1
XT
R
Examples:
RV1 4 0 10 20 THR( 1 1E-6 1E9 ) 1NS
RI2 4 0 I(R2,10) THR( 10MA 1E-6 1E-9 ) 1NS
This function implements a static transfer behavior described by an ideal
threshold. For controlling signal < XT the resistance assumes the value R1, while
for controlling signal > XT the resistance assumes the value R2. For controlling
signal = XT the resistance assumes the value R2.
The default values of the parameters are the following:
parameters default values units
XT (threshold) 0.0 Volts or Amps
R1 (resistance) 1/GMAX ohms
R2 (resistance) 1/GMIN ohms
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-33
2.6.5 Hysteresis Static Transfer Function
.
Syntax: HYST( <XT1 XT2 <R1 <R2>>> )
R2
V (V) for VCR
I (A) for CCR

R1
XT2XT1
R
Examples:
RV1 4 0 10 20 HYST( 0 1 1E-6 1E9 ) 1NS
RI2 4 0 I(R2,10) HYST( 0 10MA 1E-6 1E9 ) 1NS
This function implements a static transfer behavior described by an ideal
hysteresis cycle. For controlling signal < XT1 the resistance assumes the value
R1, while for controlling signal > XT2 the resistance assumes the value R2. In
the interval XT1 XT2 the resistance assumes the value R1 if the controlling signal
is increasing from values < XT1 to values > XT1, while the resistance assumes
the value R2 if the controlling signal is decreasing from values > XT2 to values <
XT2.
The default values of the parameters are the following:
parameters default values units
XT1 (threshold) 0.0 Volts or Amps
XT2 (threshold) 0.0 Volts or Amps
R1 (resistance) 1/GMAX ohms
R2 (resistance) 1/GMIN ohms
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-34
2.7 Dynamic Transfer Functions for Voltage or Current-Controlled
Resistors
.
The dynamic transfer function is a linear, time-invariant transformation that can
be performed in the control link chain after the delay operator and before the
static function. Its behavior can be described in three different ways:
- In time-domain by means of its unit-step response s(t). This can implement the
so called BTM (Behavioral Time Modeling) technique to obtain models directly
in time-domain.
- In the s-plane by means of its transfer response H(s) defined with poles and
zeros in the complex frequency domain (s-plane).
- In the z-plane by means of its transfer response H(z) defined with poles and
zeros in the digital complex frequency domain (z-plane).
DWS transforms any of these description forms into discretized time transfer
functions with a time step corresponding to that chosen by the user for the
simulation (TSTEP).
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-35
2.7.1 Unit-step Dynamic Response
.
The time-domain unit-step response can be described in the two DWS standard
ways: Piece-Wise Linear or File.
- Piece-Wise Linear
Syntax: s(t) = PWL( X1 Y1 X2 Y2 <X3 Y3 <X4 Y4 ...
<X199 Y199 <X200 Y200>>>> )
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4 Y5
t
s(t)
Y6
X6
Examples:
REX 4 0 10 20 1 s(t)=PWL( 0 .25 1US .5 3US 1 )
REY 4 0 I(R2,10) THR( 10MA ) s(t)=PWL( 0 .25 1US .5 3US 1 )
In this case the behavior of unit-step response s(t) is given by a PieceWise Linear
behavior containing up to 200 breakpoints. The pairs of values XiYi are the
breakpoint coordinates. Each pair specifies that the value of s(t) is Yi at time = Xi
expressed in seconds. The number of pairs (n) must be 2n200. The value of
s(t) at intermediate time values is determined by using linear interpolation on the
input values.
For time < X1 it is assumed that s(t)=0. For time > Xn it is assumed that s(t)=Yn.
The pairs must be written in order of increasing time values (Xi < Xi+1).
Use note:
As far as possible it is recommended to perform the BTM (Behavioral Time
Modeling) using the PWL fitting of dynamic behaviors because it is the fastest
approach in terms of simulation time. Simulation time is directly proportional to
the number of breakpoints n and inversely proportional to the simulation time
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-36
step TSTEP. A further advantage (about a factor 2) in simulation speed can be
achieved if the values of time coordinates Xi are chosen as integer multiples of
TSTEP.
- File
Syntax: s(t) = FILE( filename )
t
s(t)
Extracted
pure
delay
T
TSTEP
file samples
sampled values
Examples:
REY 4 0 10 20 1 s(t) = FILE( srsamples )
REX 4 0 I(R2,10) 1 s(t) = FILE( srsamples )
In this case the behavior of unit-step response is given by its n samples s(kT),
0kn-1, at fixed step (T) contained in the DWS-format file identified by the
parameter filename. File name must begin with a letter. Strings beginning with
'DC' or 'dc' are invalid file names since these strings are interpreted as the DC
parameter of an independent source.
The value of s(t) after the last sample contained in the file is assumed to hold the
value of the last sample. During the simulation loop, DWS performs a time-
convolution process involving coefficients obtained sampling the file contents at
simulation time step (TSTEP). If TSTEP is not coincident with the file time step
T, these coefficients will be calculated by means of linear interpolation between
file samples.
User note:
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-37
The file representation of dynamic behavior is the most direct and accurate way
to perform BTM, because DWS outputs coming from simulation or time-domain
measure can be utilized without processing. Nevertheless its use can become
more time-consuming than PWL due to time-convolution, that causes a quadratic
growth of simulation time versus the inverse of simulation time step (1/TSTEP).
Therefore, whenever possible, it is advisable to choose piece-wise-linear step
response descriptions, which guarantee linear growth of simulation time versus
sampling frequency.
In case the file description is utilized for accuracy reasons despite its computing
requirement, it is suggested to extract the possible pure delay component of s(t)
and place it into the delay operator provided in the control link chain, in order to
limit the number of convolution coefficients as far as possible.
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-38
2.7.2 S-plane Dynamic Transfer Function
..
Syntax: H(s) = ZEROS( Rez1 Imz1 ... Rezm Imzm ) POLES( Rep1 Imp1 ...
Repn Impn ) H0=value
Examples:
REHS 4 0 10 20 1 H(s) = ZEROS( 0 1 ) POLES( -50K 0 -1K 25MEG )
H0=5
REHS 4 0 I(R2,10) 1 H(s) = ZEROS( 0 1 ) POLES( -50K 0
-1K 25MEG ) H0=5
The behavior of the dynamic response is described in the complex frequency
plane (s) through its pole/zero representation expressed in the following general
form:
H(s) = K
(s-s ) ... (s-s )(s-s )(s-s ) ... (s-s )(s-s )
(s-s ) ... (s-s )(s-s )(s-s ) ... (s-s )(s-s )
z1 zr z,r+1 z,r+1
*
zm zm
*
p1 pq p,q+1 p,q+1*
pn pn
*
where:
szi = Rezi is the generic real zero,
szi = Rezi + jImzi and szi* = Rezi - jImzi are the generic couple of complex
conjugate zeros,
spi = Repi is the generic real pole,
spi = Repi + jImpi and spi* = Repi - jImpi are the generic couple of complex
conjugate poles
j

Re ,Im
Re ,-Im
Re ,Im
Re ,-Im
Re ,0
Re ,0
pi
zi
pi
pi
pi pi
zi zi
zi zi
real zero
real pole
complex conjugate zeros
complex conjugate poles
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-39
The zeros (poles) in the s-plane are defined by a maximum of 10 pairs of values.
No particular ordering of these values is required. Every pair (Rei,Imi) represents
either a real root (in which case Imi=0 and Rei is the root value expressed in
1/second) or a pair of complex roots Rei+jImi, Rei-jImi (Rei expressed in
1/second and Imi expressed in radians/second).
For stable systems all poles must lie in the left half-plane ( < 0) so that Repi < 0.
H0 is the steady state value of the dynamic transfer function. More precisely, if k
is the number of zeros in the origin, H(s)=H'(s)*sk with H'(0) not null neither
infinite, then:
= H'(0) = K
(-s ) ...(-s )|-s | ... |-s |
(-s ) ...(-s )|-s | ... |-s |
z1 z,r+1-k z,m-k
p1 pq p,q+1 pn
z,r-k
2
2 2
2
H0
As any H(s) transfer function is subject to a bilinear transformation with
sampling period T equal to the time step chosen for simulation TSTEP, the
frequency response of the filter actually simulated by DWS is a warped version
of that described by H(s), according to the nonlinear frequency transformation
 = 2/T * tan(T/2)
where  is the frequency (in radians/second) of the actually simulated filter and
 is the corresponding frequency of the filter with H(s) response. This nonlinear
relationship is to be taken into account whenever an H(s) description is used.
When working with small simulation time step (TSTEP), some well known
numerical troubles can arise due to rounding errors of signals and coefficients.
Before starting the simulation, DWS automatically evaluates this possibility and,
if potential troubles are detected, a specific warning message will be issued at
standard output.
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-40
2.7.3 Z-plane Dynamic Transfer Function
..
Syntax: H(z) = ZEROS( Rez1 Imz1 ... Rezm Imzm ) POLES( Rep1 Imp1 ...
Repn Impn ) H0=value T=value
Examples:
REHZ 4 0 10 20 1 H(z) = ZEROS( 0 1 ) POLES( 50M 0 ) H0=5
T=1US
REHZ 4 0 I(R2,10) 1 H(z) = ZEROS( 0 1 ) POLES( 50M 0 ) H0=5
T=1US
The behavior of the dynamic response is described in the digital complex plane z
through its pole/zero representation expressed in the general form:
H(z) = K
(z-z ) ... (z-z )(z-z )(z-z ) ... (z-z )(z-z )
(z-z ) ... (z-z )(z-z )(z-z ) ... (z-z )(z-z )
z1 zr z,r+1 z,r+1
*
zm zm
*
p1 pq p,q+1 p,q+1
*
pn pn
*
where:
zzi = Rezi is the generic real zero,
zzi = Rezi + jImzi and zzi* = Rezi - jImzi are the generic couple of complex
conjugate zeros,
zpi = Repi is the generic real pole,
zpi = Repi + jImpi and zpi* = Repi - jImpi are the generic couple of complex
conjugate poles
Re ,0zi
Re ,-Impi pi
Re ,0pi
Re ,Impi pi
Re ,Imzi zi
Re ,-Imzi zi
real zero real pole
complex conjugate
complex conjugate
zeros
poles
z = -1
( = )
z = 1
 ( = 0 )
Im[z]
Re[z]
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-41
The zeros (poles) in the z-plane are defined by a maximum of 10 pairs of values.
No particular ordering of these values is required. Every pair (Rei,Imi) represents
either a real root (in which case Imi=0 and Rei is the root value) or a pair of
complex roots Rei+jImi, Rei-jImi.
For stable systems all zeros and poles must lie within the unit circle.
H0 is the zero frequency value (z=1) of the dynamic transfer function. More
precisely, if k is the number of zeros for z=1, H(z)=H'(z)*(z-1)k with H'(1) not
null neither infinite, then H0=H'(1).
T is the sampling period (in seconds) that has been used to time discretize the
dynamic transfer function.
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-42
2.8 Linear Capacitors
.
N -N +
V0
General form:
CXXXXXXX N+ N- value <IC=V0>
Examples:
C10 10 0 1NF
COSC 15 32 100P IC=2V
N+ and N- are the positive and negative element nodes, respectively. Value is the
capacitance in Farads.
The optional initial condition.. is the initial (time-zero) value of capacitor voltage
V0 (in Volts). Note that the initial conditions (if any) apply 'only' if the UIC
option. is specified on the .TRAN statement.
Note:
As already mentioned in 1.2.3, the default integration method for linear capacitor
is trapezoidal corresponding to the open stub model. Each one-port grounded
capacitor is dealt with as a "short" open stub:
stub model
C
N
Z0 =
TSTEP
2C
TD = TSTEP
2
N
Stub model of one-port grounded capacitor.
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-43
In case of two-port capacitor, the automatic conversion (see 1.2.3) will apply
before the simulation loop.
Cxxx
Z0 =
TSTEP
2C
TD = TSTEP
2
N+ N-
Cxxx
AS.Cxxx
N+ N- AS.Cxxx
N+ N-
For grounded capacitors, a "link" transmission line model can be specified using
the unit-delay line equivalent (see also 2.12):
Z0 =
TSTEP
C
TD = TSTEP
TxxxVo
N+ N-Io N+ N-
unit-delay line
with the following syntax:
TXXXXXXX N+ N- C=value <IC=V0,I0>
This form can be used instead of normal SPICE-like form when decoupling
between ports N+ and N- is required.
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-44
2.9 Linear Inductors
.
N -N +
I0
General form:
LXXXXXXX N+ N- value <IC=I0>
Examples:
L1 24 0 10NH
LOSC 32 65 1U IC=22.3MA
N+ and N- are the positive and negative element nodes, respectively. Value is the
inductance in Henries.
The optional initial condition is the initial (time-zero) value of inductor current I0
(in Amps) that flows from N+, through the inductor, to N-. Note that the initial
conditions.. (if any) apply 'only' if the UIC option. is specified on the .TRAN
statement.
Note:
The default integration method for one-port grounded inductor is trapezoidal,
corresponding to the shorted stub model. Each one-port grounded inductor is
dealt with as "short" shorted stub.
stub model
L
N
Z0 = TSTEP
2L
TD = TSTEP
2
N
Io Io
Stub model of one-port grounded inductor.
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-45
As already mentioned in 1.2.3, the default integration method for two-port linear
inductor corresponds to the "link" transmission-line model.
This assures decoupling between ports N+ and N-.
Z0 = TSTEP
L
TD = TSTEP
Lxxx
N+ N-
Io
N+ N-
unit-delay line
Link transmission-line model of two-port inductor.
If a trapezoidal integration method is preferred, it is necessary to use the
following equivalent:
Lxxx
Z0 =
TSTEP
2L
TD = TSTEP
2
N+ N-
Lxxx
ASL
N+ N- ASLN+ N-
Io
Io Io
NS
ASL N+ N- NS
LXXX NS 0 value <IC=I0>
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-46
2.10 Coupled Inductors
General form:
KXXXXXXX LYYYYYYY LZZZZZZZ value
Examples:
K43 LAA LBB 0.12345
KXFRMR L1 L2 0.87
LYYYYYYY and LZZZZZZZ are the names of the two coupled inductors, and
value is the coupling coefficient, K, which must be greater than 0 and less than 1.
Using the 'dot' convention, place a 'dot' on the first node of each inductor.
Note that all the coupled inductors must have different names.
DWS groups together the coupled inductors and then converts each group into an
equivalent model.
Example
Two inductors LYYY and LZZZ, coupled by a coefficient of value value, will be
converted in the following elements:
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-47
L ngroup
LYYY LZZZ M
LZZZ M
L ngroup
LYYY LZZZ M
LYYY M
L ngroup
LYYY LZZZ M
M
M value LYYY LZZZ
_ _
_ _
_ _ _
1
2
1 2
2
2
2

 


 


 
 
where ngroup identifies the group.
Note:
If a large number of coupled inductors is present, simulation results could be
unstable. In this case, if the circuit implements an actual configuration, the
simulation convergence could be reached by reducing the simulation time step.
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-48
2.11 Unbalanced Transmission Lines
.
N+ N-
I
0
V0
Z T0 D
General form:
TXXXXXXX N+ N- Z0=value TD=value <IC=V0,I0>
TXXXXXXX N+ 0 N- 0 Z0=value TD=value <IC=V0,I0>
Examples:
T1 1 2 Z0=50 TD=10NS
TUNB 10 0 20 0 Z0=100 TD=1NS
This element statement defines a lossless unbalanced transmission line connected
between ports N+ and N-. Its syntax is SPICE compatible if the ground node 0 is
specified at both ports. A shorter DWS-syntax where ground node 0 is omitted at
both ports is also available.
Z0 is the characteristic impedance (ohms). The electrical length of the line is
expressed in the form of transmission delay time TD (s). The parameter TD will
be dealt with in two different modes according to the DELAYMETH option
statement, as shown in 1.2.5. If the parameter TD is set to a value < TSTEP, the
discretized delay will assume the value TSTEP. As default, the line delay will be
rounded to the integer multiple of TSTEP closest to TD. This element models
only one unbalanced propagation mode.
The optional initial condition specification consists of the initial (time-zero)
values of the voltage V0 (in Volts) at the transmission line ports and of the
current I0 (in Amps) that flows from N+, through the transmission line, to N-.
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-49
The initial conditions (if any) apply 'only' if the UIC option is specified on the
.TRAN statement.
Unbalanced transmission line ports cannot be directly connected to ground by
specifying 0 as a port identifier: an external one-port linear resistor whose
conductance is Gmax must be used to short the grounded port. As specified for
all DWS element ports, a transmission line port cannot be left open. A resistor of
conductance Gmin must be used to terminate the open port.
Examples:
shorted line:
network
10 20
TSHORTED 10 20 Z0=50 TD=1NS
RSHORT 20 0 0
open line:
network
10 20
TOPEN 10 20 Z0=50 TD=1NS
ROPEN 20 0 1E9
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-50
2.12 Balanced Transmission Lines
.
N1
N2
N3
N4
Z TD0V
I0
0
I0
General form:
TXXXXXXX N1 N2 N3 N4 Z0=value TD=value <IC=V0,I0>
Example:
TBAL 1 2 3 4 Z0=100 TD=1NS
This element statement defines a 4-port lossless transmission line carrying only
one propagating mode (balanced mode) between balanced ports formed by the
pairs N1, N2 and N3, N4. If both N2 and N4 are defined as ground (0) node, this
element becomes an unbalanced transmission line propagating only one
unbalanced mode (see 2.10). Z0 is the balanced characteristic impedance.
(ohms). The electrical length of the line is expressed in the form of transmission
delay time.. TD (s).
As already pointed out at 1.2.3, balanced ports are automatically converted
during the two-port conversion, so that the balanced transmission line is
converted to two series adaptors and an unbalanced transmission line of
impedance Z0 and delay TD. All the considerations regarding TD already made
in 2.10 apply as well in this case. The parameter TD will be dealt with in two
different modes according to the DELAYMETH option statement, as shown in
1.2.5. If the parameter TD is set to a value < TSTEP, the discretized delay will
assume the value TSTEP.
Since this element models only one propagating mode, in steady state the
differential voltage VN1-VN2 is equal to VN3-VN4, while, in general, VN1VN3
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-51
and VN2VN4. To simulate the propagation of two modes (even and odd..), two
transmission-line elements connected by means of bimodal adaptors are required
(see bimodal adaptor for further clarification).
The optional initial condition specification consists of the initial (time-zero)
values of the differential voltage V0 (in Volts) at the balanced ports ( V0 = VN1-
VN2 = VN3-VN4) and of the current I0 (in Amps) that flows from N1, through the
transmission line, to N3. The initial conditions (if any) apply 'only' if the UIC
option. is specified on the .TRAN statement.
Only ports N2 and N4 can be simultaneously connected to ground, specifying 0
as port identifier, to define an unbalanced line. In general, to ground a port it is
necessary to connect it to an external one-port resistor whose conductance is
Gmax. As specified for all DWS element ports, a transmission line port cannot be
left open. A resistor of conductance Gmin must be used to terminate the open
port.
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-52
2.13 Unit-Delay Transmission Lines
.
N+ N-
Z0
I
0
V0
,TSTEP
TRUE UDTL
N+ N- CAPACITIVE UDTL
N+ N- INDUCTIVE UDTL
General form:
TXXXXXXX N+ N- Z0=value <IC=V0,I0>
TXXXXXXX N+ N- C=value <IC=V0,I0>
TXXXXXXX N+ N- L=value <IC=V0,I0>
Examples:
T1 1 2 Z0=50
TCAP 7 12 C=1PF
TIND 10 20 L=10NH
Unit-Delay Transmission Lines (UDTL) are a particular type of unbalanced lines
connecting ports N+ and N-, characterized by having a delay corresponding to
simulation time step (TSTEP).
UDTLs are normally used for decoupling. purposes and/or for defining reference
impedance (see 1.2.4).. The characteristic impedance of the line may be
expressed in one of three forms. In true Unit-Delay Transmission Lines
impedance Z0 (ohm) is specified directly and doesn't depend on TSTEP. In
Capacitive Unit-Delay Transmission Lines a capacitance C (Farads) is given and
Z0 is set to TSTEP/C. In Inductive Unit-Delay Transmission Lines an inductance
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-53
L (Henries) is specified and Z0 is set to L/TSTEP. The delay of the line is always
set to TSTEP.
The Capacitive UDTL can be considered also as a way to define a grounded
capacitor modeled by means of a minimum delay link transmission line (see 2.8).
The Inductive UDTL corresponds to a two-port inductor defined as in 2.9,
because of the "link" default model for inductors. Both Capacitive and Inductive
UDTL are used to define the impedance by adding to the network an element
whose additional effect (loading) is capacitive or inductive independently from
TSTEP.
The optional initial condition specification consists of the initial (time-zero)
values of the voltage V0 (in Volts) at the transmission line ports and of the
current I0 (in Amps) that flows from N+, through the transmission line, to N-.
The initial conditions (if any) apply 'only' if the UIC option is specified on the
.TRAN statement.
Unit-Delay Transmission Line ports cannot be directly connected to ground by
specifying 0 as a port identifier: an external one-port linear resistor whose
conductance is Gmax must be used to short the grounded port. As specified for
all DWS element ports, a transmission line port cannot be left open. A resistor of
conductance Gmin must be used to terminate the open port.
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-54
2.14 Ideal Transformers
.
General form:
NXXXXXXX N1 N2 N3 N4 n
or
NXXXXXXX N1 N2 N3 N4 n Z0=value
NXXXXXXX N1 N2 N3 N4 n C=value
NXXXXXXX N1 N2 N3 N4 n L=value
or
NXXXXXXX N1 N2 N3 N4 n Z01=value
NXXXXXXX N1 N2 N3 N4 n C1=value
NXXXXXXX N1 N2 N3 N4 n L1=value
or
NXXXXXXX N1 N2 N3 N4 n Z02=value
NXXXXXXX N1 N2 N3 N4 n C2=value
NXXXXXXX N1 N2 N3 N4 n L2=value
This element statement defines an Ideal Transformer. between the ports formed
by the pairs N1, N2 and N3, N4. The parameter n is the turns ratio of the
transformer.
The definition equations of the transformer are represented by:
VN3,N4 = n VN1,N2
IN3 = - (1/n) IN1
IN2 = - IN1
IN4 = - IN3
'Dot' convention: the 'dot' is on the first node of each port.
If the optional parameters Z0x, Cx or Lx are not given, the reference impedance
at the two ports will automatically be set by the circuit elements connected to the
Ideal Transformer. If, due to network topology, the reference impedance at the
two ports cannot be defined, one of the optional parameters must be specified. In
this way two additional transmission lines with a delay of TSTEP/2, connected at
N1 N3
N2 N4
nI
I
I
I
V V
N 1
N 2 N 4
N 3
N 1 , N 2 N 3 , N 4
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-55
the intrinsic Ideal Transformer, decouple it from the other elements of the
network. The characteristic impedance of these lines may be expressed in one of
three forms: directly as impedance Z0 (ohms), as capacitance C (Farads), so Z0 is
set to TSTEP/(2*C), or as inductance L (Henries), so Z0 is set to 2*L/TSTEP.
If the Ideal Transformer is described with no node directly connected to ground
(node 0), the additional lines are true or capacitive or inductive balanced
transmission lines (Fig.2.13.1); if one of the nodes of each port of the Ideal
Transformer is ground node (node 0), the additional line is a true or capacitive or
inductive unbalanced transmission line (Fig.2.13.2).
N1
N2
TD=TSTEP/2
L /2p2L /2p1
TD=TSTEP/2
N3
N4
Zp2Zp1
N1
N2
Cp1
N3
N4
Cp2
L /2L /2 p2p1
N3
N4
N1
N2
Fig.2.13.1: Electrical equivalents of Ideal Transformer when additional
parameters Z0, C, L are specified for decoupling.
Another method to follow, pointed out in 1.2.4, is to use a Unit-Delay
Transmission Line for decoupling purposes, but in this case an additional line
with a delay of TSTEP is introduced in the network, leading to an additional
transient effect greater than that due to internal Z0 setting.
Nx
TD=TSTEP/2
Lp1
TD=TSTEP/2
Ny
Zp2Zp1
Nx
Cp1
Ny
Cp2
NyNx
Lp2
Fig.2.13.2: Electrical equivalents of Ideal Transformer with grounded nodes
when additional parameters Z0, C, L are specified for decoupling.
The reference impedance at the two ports can assume the same value or different
values depending on the optional parameters, according to the following table:
Parameters Zp1 Zp2 Cp1 Cp2 Lp1 Lp2
Z0, C, L Z0 Z0 C C L L
Z01, C1, L1 Z01 n2Z01 C1 C1/n2 L1 n2L1
Z02, C2, L2 Z02/n2 Z02 n2C2 C2 L2/n2 L2
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-56
2.15 Junction Diodes
.
N+ N-
General form:
DXXXXXXX N+ N- MNAME <AREA>
DXXXXXXX N+ N- MNAME <AREA> Z0=value
DXXXXXXX N+ N- MNAME <AREA> C=value
DXXXXXXX N+ N- MNAME <AREA> L=value
Examples:
DBRIDGE 40 50 DMOD 3
DTERM 20 0 DIODE Z0=50
The Diode statement must reference a particular diode model, described in a
.MODEL statement. N+ and N- are the positive and negative nodes, respectively.
MNAME is the model name. Model name must begin with a letter. Strings
beginning with 'DC' or 'dc' are invalid model names since these strings are
interpreted as the DC parameter of an independent source. The optional
parameter AREA is the area factor that simulates the effects of geometry on the
diodes. If the area factor is omitted, a value of 1.0 is assumed.
If the optional parameters Z0, C or L are not given, the reference impedance at
the N+ and N- ports will be automatically set by the circuit elements connected
to the Diode. If, due to network topology, the port reference impedance cannot be
defined, one of the three optional parameters must be specified. In this way an
additional transmission line with a delay of TSTEP/2, connected at the intrinsic
Diode, decouples it from the other elements of the network. The characteristic
impedance of this line may be expressed in one of three forms: directly as
impedance Z0 (ohms), as capacitance C (Farads), so Z0 is set to TSTEP/(2*C), or
as inductance L (Henries), so Z0 is set to 2*L/TSTEP.
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-57
If the Diode is described as two-port element (i.e. neither N+ nor N- is ground
node), the additional line is a true or capacitive or inductive balanced
transmission line (fig.2.14.1); if the Diode is described as one-port element (i.e.
either N+ or N- is ground node), the additional line is a true or capacitive or
inductive unbalanced transmission line (fig.2.14.2).
intrinsic
diode
N+
N-
C
N+
N-
L/2
L/2
TD=TSTEP/2
Z0
N+
N-
Fig.2.14.1: Electrical equivalents of two-port diode when additional
parameters Z0,C,L are specified for decoupling.
Another method to follow, pointed out in 1.2.4, is to use a Unit-Delay
Transmission Line for decoupling purposes, but in this case an additional line
with a delay of TSTEP is introduced in the network, leading to an additional
transient effect greater than that due to internal Z0 setting.
intrinsic
diode
Z0 TD=TSTEP/2
N N
C
N
L
Fig.2.14.2: Electrical equivalents of one-port diode when additional
parameters Z0,C,L are specified for decoupling.
- Diode Parameters in .MODEL Statement
Diode Model:
.MODEL MNAME D <PNAME1=PVAL1> <PNAME2=PVAL2> ...
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-58
The .MODEL statement specifies the set of model parameters that will be used
by diodes. MNAME is the model name. Parameter values are defined by
appending the parameter name, as given below, followed by an equal sign and
the parameter value. If a model parameter is omitted, the default value is
assumed.
The dc characteristics of the diode are determined by the parameters IS and N.
An ohmic resistance, RS, is included. Charge storage effects are modeled by a
transit time, TT, and a nonlinear depletion layer capacitance which is determined
by the parameters CJO, VJ, and M. The temperature dependence of the saturation
current is defined by the parameters EG, the energy, and XTI, the saturation
current temperature exponent.
Diode model parameters :
PNAME default values units
*IS : saturation current 1.0E-14 Amps
*RS : ohmic resistance 0 Ohm
N : emission coefficient 1
TT : transit time 0 seconds
*CJO : zero-bias junction capacitance 0 Farads
VJ : junction potential 1 Volts
M : grading coefficient 0.5
EG : activation energy 1.11 eV
XTI : saturation-current temp. exp. 3
FC : coefficient for forward-bias depletion
capacitance formula
0.5
* parameter value changes when area not equal to 1.
- Diode Parameters in .OPTIONS Statement
.OPTIONS <MODLIST>
If MODLIST is specified, the program lists diode model parameters.
Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Passive Elements DWS
Chapter 2 2-59
- Diode Parameters in .TEMP Statement
.TEMP value
value is the temperature in degrees C. If no .TEMP statement appears in the
circuit description, the default value is 27 degrees C.
DWS 8.5 USER MANUAL
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Independent Sources DWS
Chapter 3 3-1
Chapter 3
I n d e p e n d e n t S o u r c e s
3. 3
3.1 Independent Voltage Sources
3.2 Independent Current Sources
3.3 Independent Source Functions
3.3.1 DC Source Function
3.3.2 Pulse Source Function
3.3.3 PulsePoly Source Function
3.3.4 PulseErfc Source Function
3.3.5 Erfc Source Function
3.3.6 Delta Source Function
3.3.7 Sinusoidal Source Function
3.3.8 Piece-Wise Linear Source Function
3.3.9 PulsePwl Source Function
3.3.10 File Source Function
3.3.11 PulseFile Source Function
3.4 Source Functions with a Parameter Controlled by a Node Voltage
3.5 Binary Digit Sequence
3.5.1 Sequence Definition
3.5.2 Single Sequence
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Independent Sources DWS
Chapter 3 3-2
3.5.3 Periodic Sequence
3.5.4 Burst Sequence
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Independent Sources DWS
Chapter 3 3-3
3.1 Independent Voltage Sources (Thevenin Equivalent)
.
N -
N +
+
V
R
General form:
VXXXXXXX N+ N- source <R>
N+ and N- are the positive and negative nodes, respectively. Positive current is
assumed to flow from the positive node, through the source, to the negative node.
Source is the independent source function.
The optional parameter R is the internal resistance (in ohms) and may be positive
(1/GMAX  R  1/GMIN) or negative (-1/GMIN  R  -1/GMAX). If the
parameter R is omitted or set to zero, the default value 1/GMAX will be assumed
(see the .OPTIONS statement).
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Independent Sources DWS
Chapter 3 3-4
3.2 Independent Current Sources (Norton Equivalent)
.
N -
N +
RI
General form:
IXXXXXXX N+ N- source <R>
N+ and N- are the positive and negative nodes, respectively. A current source of
positive value will force current to flow from the N+ node, through the source, to
the N- node. Source is the independent source function.
The optional parameter R is the internal resistance (in ohms) and may be positive
(1/GMAX  R  1/GMIN) or negative (-1/GMIN  R  -1/GMAX). If the
parameter R is omitted or set to zero, the default value 1/GMIN will be assumed
(see the .OPTIONS statement).
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Independent Sources DWS
Chapter 3 3-5
3.3 Independent Source Functions
.
Eleven independent source functions are available: DC, Pulse, PulsePoly,
PulseErfc, Erfc, Delta, Sinusoidal, Piece-Wise Linear, PulsePwl, File and
PulseFile. The DC, Pulse, Sinusoidal and Piece-Wise Linear functions have the
same syntax and meaning of the corresponding functions used in SPICE. The
PulsePoly, PulseErfc, PulsePwl and PulseFile functions are the extensions of the
Pulse function when the behavior of pulse edges can be expressed in several
ways including polynomial, piecewise linear and generic behaviors described in a
DWS output file.
3.3.1 DC Source Function
.
Syntax: DC <(>VDC<)>
VDC
t
V(V)
I(A)
Example:
VIN 4 0 DC( -5 )
The source value is time-invariant (e.g. a power supply). The value may
optionally be enclosed by round brackets.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Independent Sources DWS
Chapter 3 3-6
3.3.2 Pulse Source Function
.
Syntax: PULSE( V1 V2 <TD <TR <TF <PW <PER>>>>> )
V1
V2
0
TD TR PW
PER
TF t
I(A)
V(V)
Example:
VIN 4 0 PULSE( -1 1 5NS 1NS 1NS 24NS 50NS )
parameters default values units
V1 (initial value) Volts or Amps
V2 (pulsed value) Volts or Amps
TD (delay time) 0.0 seconds
TR (rise time) TSTEP seconds
TF (fall time) TSTEP seconds
PW (pulse width) TSTOP seconds
PER(period) TSTOP seconds
A single pulse so specified is described by the following breakpoint table:
time value
0 V1
TD V1
TD+TR V2
TD+TR+PW V2
TD+TR+PW+TF V1
TSTOP V1
Intermediate points are determined by linear interpolation.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Independent Sources DWS
Chapter 3 3-7
3.3.3 PulsePoly Source Function
.
Syntax: PULSE( V1 V2 <TD <TR <TF <PW <PER>>>>> )
POLY( C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 )
V1
V2
0
TD TR PW
PER
TF t
V(V)
I(A)
Example:
VIN 4 0 PULSE( -1 1 5NS 1NS 1NS 24NS 50NS ) POLY( 0 .13
-.3.24 23.45 -36.62 21.17 -3.89 )
This function is an extension of the basic pulse function, when rise and fall edge
behaviors are not linear but can be fitted by a higher-degree polinomial. The
meaning and the default values of PulsePoly parameters are like those of the
corresponding parameters of Pulse, unless edge shape is described by a 6-degree
polynomial in PulsePoly source. C0, C1, ... C6 are the coefficients of the
polynomial.

BASIC POLY DEFINITION WINDOW
0
1
0
1
RISE-EDGE WINDOW
V1
V2
TR
FALL-EDGE WINDOW
V1
V2
TF
t
POLY(t) POLY(t)=
6
n=0
Cn tn
=1
n=0
6
Cn
Fig.3.3.3.1: Mapping of basic poly definition window into rise and fall windows.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Independent Sources DWS
Chapter 3 3-8
The polynomial is defined between 0 and 1 and, at the lower and upper limits of
this range, must assume the values 0 and 1 respectively, in order that the actual
edge shape will reflect the polynomial shape. The polynomial definition window
will be automatically scaled to the actual windows TR, V1, V2 and TF, V2,
V1.(fig.3.3.3.1).
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Independent Sources DWS
Chapter 3 3-9
3.3.4 PulseErfc Source Function
.
Syntax: PULSE( V1 V2 <TD <TR <TF <PW <PER>>>>> ) ERFC
V1
V2
0
TD TR PW
PER
TF t
V(V)
I(A)
Example:
VIN 4 0 PULSE( -1 1 5NS 1NS 1NS 24NS 50NS ) ERFC
This function is an extension of the basic pulse function when rise and fall edges
can be fitted by a complementary error function (erfc) behavior. The meaning
and the default values of PulseErfc parameters are like those of the
corresponding parameters of Pulse, unless edge shape is that of erfc. The
definition window of erfc will be automatically scaled to the rise and fall edge
windows.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Independent Sources DWS
Chapter 3 3-10
3.3.5 Erfc Source Function
.
Syntax: ERFC( V1 V2 TD TR )
V1
V2
0
TD TR t
V(V)
I(A)
Example:
VIN 4 0 ERFC( -1 1 5NS 1NS )
parameters units
V1 (initial value) Volts or Amps
V2 (final value) Volts or Amps
TD (delay time) seconds
TR (rise time) seconds
The shape of the waveform is described by the following table:
time value
0 to TD V1
TD+TR to TSTOP V2
from TD to TD+TR the edge shape is like the shape of erfc function.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Independent Sources DWS
Chapter 3 3-11
3.3.6 Delta Source Function
.
Syntax: DELTA( <V <TD>> )
V
0
TD t
V(V)
I(A)
Example:
VIN 4 0 DELTA( 1 5NS )
parameters default values units
V (impulse value) 1.0 Volts or Amps
TD (delay time) 0.0 seconds
This function implements a delayed Dirac's pulse behavior according to the
following table:
time value
0 to TD- 0
TD V
TD+ to TSTOP 0
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Independent Sources DWS
Chapter 3 3-12
3.3.7 Sinusoidal Source Function
.
Syntax: SIN( VO VA <FREQ <TD <THETA>>> )
0
TD
V0
VA
1/ FREQ
THETA
t
V(V)
I(A)
Example:
VIN 4 0 SIN( 0 1 100MEG 5NS 10MEG )
parameters default values units
VO (offset) Volts or Amps
VA (amplitude) Volts or Amps
FREQ (frequency) 1/TSTOP Hz
TD (delay) 0.0 seconds
THETA (damping factor) 0.0 1/seconds
This function implements an exponentially decaying sinusoidal behavior
described by the following table:
time value
0 to TD Y0
TD to TSTOP VO + VA*exp(-(t-TD)*THETA)*sin(2*FREQ*(t-TD))
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Independent Sources DWS
Chapter 3 3-13
3.3.8 Piece-Wise Linear Source Function
.
Syntax: PWL( T1 V1 T2 V2 <T3 V3 <T4 V4 ... <T199 V199
<T200 V200>>>> )
0
tT1 T2 T3 T4 T5
V1
V2
V3
V4 V5
V(V)
I(A)
Example:
VIN 4 0 PWL( 10NS -5 11NS -2 15NS -2 16NS -5 )
This function implements a piece-wise linear behavior containing up to 200
breakpoints. Each breakpoint is defined by a pair of values Ti,Vi. Each pair of
values (Ti, Vi) specifies that the value of the source is Vi (in Volts or Amps) at
time=Ti (in seconds). The number of pairs (n) must be 2n200. The value of the
source at intermediate values of time is determined by using linear interpolation
on the input values. For time < T1 the value of the source is V1, for time > Tn the
value of the source is Vn. The pairs must be written in order of increasing time
values (Ti  Ti+1), otherwise a specific error message is issued.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Independent Sources DWS
Chapter 3 3-14
3.3.9 PulsePwl Source Function
.
Syntax: PULSE( V1 V2 <TD <TR <TF <PW <PER>>>>> ) PWL( T1 Y1
T2 Y2 <T3 Y3 <T4 Y4 ... <T199 Y199 <T200 Y200>>>> )
V1
V2
0
TD TR PW
PER
TF t
tT1 T2 T3 T4 T5 Tn
Y1
Y2 Y3
Y4
Y5
YnV(V)
I(A)
Example:
VIN 4 0 PULSE( -1 1 5NS 2NS 2NS 23NS 50NS ) PWL( 0 -1
.3NS -.5 .6NS 0 1NS .5 1.4NS .8 2NS 1 )
This function is an extension of the basic Pulse function when rise and fall edges
can be fitted by a piece-wise linear behavior. The meaning and the default values
of PulsePwl parameters are like those of the corresponding parameters of Pulse,
unless edge shape is described by the pairs of values Ti, Yi in PulsePwl source.
The pairs, written in order of increasing time values (Ti  Ti+1), determine edge
shape, while the actual value of the source is defined by the parameters V1, V2,
TR, TF. The PWL definition window will be automatically scaled to the actual
rise and fall edge windows. The piece-wise linear swing Yn - Y1 (n: number of
pairs) will become the pulse swing V2 - V1, while the time interval Tn - T1 will
become TR for the rise edge and TF for the fall edge.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Independent Sources DWS
Chapter 3 3-15
3.3.10 File Source Function
.
Syntax: FILE( filename )
V1V0
0 t
V2
V3
Vn
T 2T 3T nT
V(V)
I(A)
Example:
VIN 4 0 FILE( fdosamples )
This function implements a source whose behavior is described by a DWS-
format file identified by the parameter filename. In this file, a sampling time step
(T) will be specified. If the simulation time step (TSTEP in .TRAN statement) is
not coincident with the file time step, the source values will be determined using
linear interpolation of the values contained in the file. After the last sample
contained in the file, the source value is assumed to be equal to the value of the
last sample. File name must begin with a letter. Strings beginning with 'DC' or
'dc' are invalid file names since these strings are interpreted as the DC parameter
of an independent source.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Independent Sources DWS
Chapter 3 3-16
3.3.11 PulseFile Source Function
.
Syntax: PULSE( NC NC <TD <NC <NC <PW <PER>>>>> )
FILE(filename)
0
TD PW
PER
t
t0
Y1
Y0
n*T
Yn
T 2T
Y2
V(V)
I(A)
Example:
VIN 4 0 PULSE( 0 0 5NS 0 0 23NS 50NS ) FILE( fdosamples )
This function is an extension of the basic Pulse function when rise and fall edges
can be described by a behavior contained in a DWS-format file identified by the
parameter filename. File name must begin with a letter. Strings beginning with
'DC' or 'dc' are invalid file names.
The meaning and the default values of the parameters TD, PW and PER are like
those of the corresponding parameters of Pulse, whereas initial value, pulsed
value, rise time, fall time and edge shape are determined by voltage or current
samples versus time contained in the file. For this reason the initial, pulsed, rise
and fall time values specified in the PULSE syntax will be not considered.
parameter value
V0 (initial value) Y0 (1st file sample)
V1 (final value) Yn (last file sample)
TR (rise time) n * T
TF (fall time) n * T
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Independent Sources DWS
Chapter 3 3-17
If the simulation time step (TSTEP in .TRAN statement) is not coincident with
the file time step, the source values will be determined using linear interpolation
of the values contained in the file.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Independent Sources DWS
Chapter 3 3-18
3.4 Source Functions with a Parameter
Controlled by a Node Voltage
.
Pulse, PulsePoly, PulseErfc, PulsePwl, PulseFile and Sinusoidal sources may
have one of their parameters controlled by a user-specified node voltage
V(nodename).
This feature allows the user to describe several kinds of modulated sources: it is
possible to modulate phase., amplitude., pulse width, period or frequency...
Example:
VAMOD 1 0 SIN( 0 1V 1KHZ )
ICARRIER 100 200 SIN( 0 V(1) 100MEG )
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Independent Sources DWS
Chapter 3 3-19
3.5 Binary Digit Sequence
.
Bit sequences can be generated as extension of available PULSE functions. The
bit string is specified by the additional parameter SEQUENCE according to the
following syntax:
Pulse PULSE( V1 V2 <TD <TR <TF <PW <PER>>>>> )
SEQUENCE
PulsePoly PULSE( V1 V2 <TD <TR <TF <PW <PER>>>>> )
POLY( C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 ) SEQUENCE
PulseErfc PULSE( V1 V2 <TD <TR <TF <PW <PER>>>>> ) ERFC
SEQUENCE
PulsePwl PULSE( V1 V2 <TD <TR <TF <PW <PER>>>>> )
PWL( T1 Y1 T2 Y2 <T3 Y3 <T4 Y4 ... <T199 Y199
<T200 Y200>>>> ) SEQUENCE
PulseFile PULSE( NC NC <TD <NC <NC <PW <PER>>>>> )
FILE(filename) SEQUENCE
PULSE function arguments are utilized to define single bit shape (V1, V2, TR,
TF, PW, PER) and starting delay of output bit stream (TD). TD represents the
first bit delay so that from time 0 to TD output value is V1. The argument PER
assumes the meaning of sequence bit-time.
Both Return-to-Zero (RZ) and Non-Return-to-Zero (NRZ) sequence encoding
can be implemented.
V2
V1
V2
V1
PERTD t
t
t
RZ
NRZ
1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0
0
1
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Independent Sources DWS
Chapter 3 3-20
If PER TR + PW + TF, the encoding scheme is RZ; the shape of a single bit is
described by the following table where s(n) represents the nth bit in the sequence
(n  1):
time s(n) value
TD to TD + TR 0 V1
1 (*)
TD + TR to TD + TR + PW 0 V1
1 V2
TD + TR + PW to TD + TR + PW + TF 0 V1
1 (*)
TD + TR + PW + TF to TD + PER 0 V1
1 V1
(*) The shape of the rise and fall edges is defined by source function.
If PER < TR + PW + TF, the encoding scheme is NRZ; the shape of a single bit
is described by the following table:
time s(n-1) s(n) value
TD to TD + TR 0 1 (*)
1 1 V2
TD to TD + TF 0 0 V1
1 0 (*)
TD + TR to TD + PER - 1 V2
TD + TF to TD + PER - 0 V1
(*) The shape of the rise and fall edges is defined by source function.
3.5.1 Sequence Definition
.
The bit sequence can be specified directly on text by means of a string of "0" and
"1" or by reference to a file containing the same string. File name must begin
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Independent Sources DWS
Chapter 3 3-21
with a letter. Strings beginning with 'DC' or 'dc' are invalid file names since these
strings are interpreted as the DC parameter of an independent source.
Three types of sequences can be described: single aperiodic sequence, periodic
sequence and burst sequence.
3.5.2 Single Sequence
..
Syntax: SSEQ( seqdescr )
Examples:
SSEQ( binary.dat )
SSEQ( 1001 0001 )
Using single sequence, the defined bit string is scanned only once and, after
reaching its end, the output will assume the initial value. seqdescr is either the
name of a file containing a binary sequence, or a binary sequence of 0's and 1's.
This binary sequence may contain separators (blank, tab, newline) placed in any
position, that will be ignored. The maximum string length between two
consecutive separators is limited to 1024 characters.
The sequence file format accepts "0", "1" and "X" (don't care) characters as
valid sequence symbols, while blank, tab and newline characters can be used as
separators, that will be ignored during the sequence generation. Comments lines,
characterized by a "*" character in first column will also be ignored, e.g.:
* start sequence
0101XX01
1000X0XX
* end sequence
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Independent Sources DWS
Chapter 3 3-22
3.5.3 Periodic Sequence
..
Syntax: PSEQ( seqdescr )
Examples:
PSEQ( binary.dat )
PSEQ( 1001 0001 )
Using periodic sequence, the output will be repeated cyclically, starting
immediately after a complete scan of defined bit sequence. Sequence period
equals sequence duration (N*PER). seqdescr is the same as in single aperiodic
sequence. If x(n) is the sequence described by seqdescr for 1  n  N, the
complete sequence is described by s(n) = x(n - kN), where k is any integer.
3.5.4 Burst Sequence
.
Syntax: SSEQ( seqdescr ) BPER=value
Examples:
SSEQ( binary.dat ) BPER=10US
SSEQ( 1001 0001 ) BPER=10US
Using burst sequence the output will be repeated cyclically with a period
specified by the parameter BPER (in seconds), that is usually far greater than
sequence duration (N*PER). seqdescr is the same as in single aperiodic
sequence. If x(n) is the sequence described by seqdescr for 1  n  N, the
complete sequence is described by the following table:
1 + k * BPER/PER  n  N + k * BPER/PER x(n-k*BPER/PER)
N + k * BPER/PER < n  (k+1) * BPER/PER 0
where k is any integer.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Independent Sources DWS
Chapter 3 3-23
For example, using the sequence 10010001, the three types of sequence
definition will generate (with NRZ, TR=0, TF=0):
t
t
tsingle sequence
periodic sequence
burst sequence
8*PER
BPER
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Independent Sources DWS
Chapter 3 3-24
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Controlled Sources DWS
Chapter 4 4-1
Chapter 4
C o n t r o l l e d S o u r c e s .
4. 4
4.1 Voltage-Controlled Voltage Sources
4.2 Voltage-Controlled Current Sources
4.3 Current-Controlled Voltage Sources
4.4 Current-Controlled Current Sources
4.5 Multiplying Voltage-Controlled Voltage Sources
4.6 Multiplying Voltage-Controlled Current Sources
4.7 Static Transfer Functions
4.7.1 Linear Static Transfer Function
4.7.2 Piece-Wise Linear Static Transfer Function
4.7.3 File Static Transfer Function
4.7.4 Threshold Static Transfer Function
4.7.5 Hysteresis Static Transfer Function
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Controlled Sources DWS
Chapter 4 4-2
4.8 Dynamic Transfer Function for Voltage or Current Controlled Sources
4.8.1 Unit-step Dynamic Response
4.8.2 S-plane Dynamic Transfer Function
4.8.3 Z-plane Dynamic Transfer Function
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Controlled Sources DWS
Chapter 4 4-3
4.1 Voltage-Controlled Voltage Sources
.
-
NC+
NC-
DELAY
D.T.F. S.T.F.
Dynamic
Transfer
Function
Static
Transfer
Function
Control Link Chain R
+
VCVS
(Thevenin)
N+
N-
General form:
EXXXXXXX N+ N- NC+ NC- STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION
<DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> <TD <R>>
-
NC+
NC-
DELAY
D.T.F.S.T.F.
Dynamic
Transfer
Function
Static
Transfer
Function
Control Link Chain R
+
VCVS
(Thevenin)
N+
N-
General form:
EXXXXXXX N+ N- NC+ NC- <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION>
STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <TD <R>>
This form is an extension of the syntax used in SPICE. N+ and N- are the
positive and negative nodes, respectively. Positive current is assumed to flow
from the positive node, through the source, to the negative node. NC+ and NC-
are the positive and negative controlling nodes, respectively. The controlling
signal is V(NC+) - V(NC-). Like the other voltage and current controlled
elements, the Voltage-Controlled Voltage Sources can have two types of control
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Controlled Sources DWS
Chapter 4 4-4
link chain with different positions of the transfer functions. The static transfer
function must be specified, while the dynamic transfer function is optional.
The optional parameter TD is a delay time, expressed in seconds. The Delay
operator is the first block of the control link chain and acts on the controlling
signal. The minimum delay is corresponding to TSTEP (specified in the .TRAN
statement) even if the input parameter TD is omitted or set to a value < TSTEP.
This approximation can be considered when zero-delay control links are
simulated. Regarding the delay discretization process, both ROUNDING and
INTERPOLATION methods described in 1.2.5 are allowed depending on the
DELAYMETH option set by the user on the DWS input file.
The optional parameter R is the internal resistance (in ohms) and may be positive
(1/GMAX  R  1/GMIN) or negative (-1/GMIN  R  -1/GMAX). If the
parameter R is omitted or set to zero, the default value 1/GMAX will be assumed
(see the .OPTIONS statement)..
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Controlled Sources DWS
Chapter 4 4-5
4.2 Voltage-Controlled Current Sources
.
-
NC+
NC-
DELAY
D.T.F. S.T.F.
Dynamic
Transfer
Function
Static
Transfer
Function
Control Link Chain
VCCS
(Norton)
N+
N-
R
General form:
GXXXXXXX N+ N- NC+ NC- STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION
<DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> <TD <R>>
-
NC+
NC-
DELAY
D.T.F.S.T.F.
Dynamic
Transfer
Function
Static
Transfer
Function
Control Link Chain
VCCS
(Norton)
N+
N-
R
General form:
GXXXXXXX N+ N- NC+ NC- <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION>
STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <TD <R>>
This form is an extension of the syntax used in SPICE. N+ and N- are the
positive and negative nodes, respectively. Current flow is from the positive node,
through the source, to the negative node. NC+ and NC- are the positive and
negative controlling nodes, respectively. The controlling signal is V(NC+) -
V(NC-). Like the other voltage and current controlled elements, the Voltage-
Controlled Current Sources can have two types of control link chain with
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Controlled Sources DWS
Chapter 4 4-6
different positions of the transfer functions. The static transfer function must be
specified, while the dynamic transfer function is optional.
The optional parameter TD is a delay time expressed in seconds. The Delay
operator is the first block of the control link chain and acts on the controlling
signal. The minimum delay is corresponding to TSTEP (specified in the .TRAN
statement) even if the input parameter TD is omitted or set to a value < TSTEP.
This approximation can be considered when zero-delay control links are
simulated. Regarding the delay discretization process, both ROUNDING and
INTERPOLATION methods described in 1.2.5 are allowed depending on the
DELAYMETH option set by the user on the DWS input file.
The optional parameter R is the internal resistance (in ohms) and may be positive
(1/GMAX  R  1/GMIN) or negative (-1/GMIN  R  -1/GMAX). If the
parameter R is omitted or set to zero, the default value 1/GMIN will be assumed
(see the .OPTIONS statement).
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Controlled Sources DWS
Chapter 4 4-7
4.3 Current-Controlled Voltage Sources
.
DELAY
D.T.F. S.T.F.
Dynamic
Transfer
Function
Static
Transfer
Function
Control Link Chain R
+
CCVS
(Thevenin)
N+
N-
N
I
ELEM
C
General form:
HXXXXXXX N+ N- I(ELEM,NC) STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION
<DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> <TD <R>>
DELAY
D.T.F.S.T.F.
Dynamic
Transfer
Function
Static
Transfer
Function
Control Link Chain R
+
CCVS
(Thevenin)
N+
N-
N
I
ELEM
C
General form:
HXXXXXXX N+ N- I(ELEM,NC) <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION>
STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <TD <R>>
This form is an extension of the syntax used in SPICE. N+ and N- are the
positive and negative nodes, respectively. Positive current is assumed to flow
from the positive node, through the source, to the negative node. The controlling
current I(ELEM,NC) is the current which enters the port of the element ELEM
connected to the node NC. Like the other voltage and current controlled
elements, the Current-Controlled Voltage Sources can have two types of control
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Controlled Sources DWS
Chapter 4 4-8
link chain with different positions of the transfer functions. The static transfer
function must be specified, while the dynamic transfer function is optional.
The optional parameter TD is a delay time expressed in seconds. The Delay
operator is the first block of the control link chain and acts on the controlling
signal. The minimum delay is corresponding to TSTEP (specified in the .TRAN
statement) even if the input parameter TD is omitted or set to a value < TSTEP.
This approximation can be considered when zero-delay control links are
simulated. Regarding the delay discretization process, both ROUNDING and
INTERPOLATION methods described in 1.2.5 are allowed depending on the
DELAYMETH option set by the user on the DWS input file.
The optional parameter R is the internal resistance (in ohms) and may be positive
(1/GMAX  R  1/GMIN) or negative (-1/GMIN  R  -1/GMAX). If the
parameter R is omitted or set to zero, the default value 1/GMAX will be assumed
(see the .OPTIONS statement).
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Controlled Sources DWS
Chapter 4 4-9
4.4 Current-Controlled Current Sources
.
DELAY
D.T.F. S.T.F.
Dynamic
Transfer
Function
Static
Transfer
Function
Control Link Chain
N
I
ELEM
R
CCCS
(Norton)
N+
N-
C
General form:
FXXXXXXX N+ N- I(ELEM,NC) STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION
<DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> <TD <R>>
DELAY
D.T.F.S.T.F.
Dynamic
Transfer
Function
Static
Transfer
Function
Control Link Chain
N
I
ELEM
R
CCCS
(Norton)
N+
N-
General form:
FXXXXXXX N+ N- I(ELEM,NC) <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION>
STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <TD <R>>
This form is an extension of the syntax used in SPICE. N+ and N- are the
positive and negative nodes, respectively. Current flow is from the positive node,
through the source, to the negative node. The controlling current I(ELEM,NC) is
the current which enters the port of the element ELEM connected to the node NC.
Like the other voltage and current controlled elements, the Current-Controlled
Current Sources can have two types of control link chain with different positions
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Controlled Sources DWS
Chapter 4 4-10
of the transfer functions. The static transfer function must be specified, while the
dynamic transfer function is optional.
The optional parameter TD is a delay time expressed in seconds. The Delay
operator is the first block of the control link chain and acts on the controlling
signal. The minimum delay is corresponding to TSTEP (specified in the .TRAN
statement) even if the input parameter TD is omitted or set to a value < TSTEP.
This approximation can be considered when zero-delay control links are
simulated. Regarding the delay discretization process, both ROUNDING and
INTERPOLATION methods described in 1.2.5 are allowed depending on the
DELAYMETH option set by the user on the DWS input file.
The optional parameter R is the internal resistance (in ohms) and may be positive
(1/GMAX  R  1/GMIN) or negative (-1/GMIN  R  -1/GMAX). If the
parameter R is omitted or set to zero, the default value 1/GMIN will be assumed
(see the .OPTIONS statement).
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Controlled Sources DWS
Chapter 4 4-11
4.5 Multiplying Voltage-Controlled Voltage Sources
.
NC1
NC2
DELAY
D.T.F. S.T.F.
Dynamic
Transfer
Function
Static
Transfer
Function
Control Link Chain R
+
MVCVS
(Thevenin)
N+
N-
+/-
+/-
General form:
EXXXXXXX N+ N- <+->NC1 * <+->NC2 STATIC-TRANSFER-
FUNCTION <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION>
<TD <R>>
NC1
NC2
DELAY
D.T.F.S.T.F.
Dynamic
Transfer
Function
Static
Transfer
Function
Control Link Chain R
+
MVCVS
(Thevenin)
N+
N-
+/-
+/-
General form:
EXXXXXXX N+ N- <+->NC1 * <+->NC2 <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-
FUNCTION> STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION
<TD <R>>
N+ and N- are the positive and negative nodes, respectively. Positive current is
assumed to flow from the positive node, through the source, to the negative node.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Controlled Sources DWS
Chapter 4 4-12
NC1 and NC2 are the two controlling nodes. The controlling signal is obtained
multiplying the voltage waveforms at the nodes NC1 and NC2. The sign of these
voltages is optional. Like the other voltage and current controlled elements, the
Multiplying Voltage-Controlled Voltage Sources can have two types of control
link chain with different positions of the transfer functions. The static transfer
function must be specified, while the dynamic transfer function is optional.
The optional parameter TD is a delay time expressed in seconds. The Delay
operator is the first block of the control link chain and acts on the controlling
signal. The minimum delay is corresponding to TSTEP (specified in the .TRAN
statement) even if the input parameter TD is omitted or set to a value < TSTEP.
This approximation can be considered when zero-delay control links are
simulated. Regarding the delay discretization process, both ROUNDING and
INTERPOLATION methods described in 1.2.5 are allowed depending on the
DELAYMETH option set by the user on the DWS input file.
The optional parameter R is the internal resistance (in ohms) and may be positive
(1/GMAX  R  1/GMIN) or negative (-1/GMIN  R  -1/GMAX). If the
parameter R is omitted or set to zero, the default value 1/GMAX will be assumed
(see the .OPTIONS statement).
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Controlled Sources DWS
Chapter 4 4-13
4.6 Multiplying Voltage-ControlledCurrent Sources
NC1
NC2
DELAY
D.T.F. S.T.F.
Dynamic
Transfer
Function
Static
Transfer
Function
Control Link Chain
R
MVCCS
(Norton)
N+
N-
+/-
+/-
General form:
GXXXXXXX N+ N- <+->NC1 * <+->NC2 STATIC-TRANSFER-
FUNCTION <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION>
<TD <R>>
NC1
NC2
DELAY
D.T.F.S.T.F.
Dynamic
Transfer
Function
Static
Transfer
Function
Control Link Chain
R
MVCCS
(Norton)
N+
N-
+/-
+/-
General form:
GXXXXXXX N+ N- <+->NC1 * <+->NC2 <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-
FUNCTION> STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION
<TD <R>>
N+ and N- are the positive and negative nodes, respectively. Current flow is from
the positive node, through the source, to the negative node. NC1 and NC2 are the
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Controlled Sources DWS
Chapter 4 4-14
two controlling nodes. The controlling signal is obtained multiplying the voltage
waveforms at the nodes NC1 and NC2. The sign of these voltages is optional.
Like the other voltage and current controlled elements, the Multiplying Voltage-
Controlled Current Sources can have two types of control link chain with
different positions of the transfer functions. The static transfer function must be
specified, while the dynamic transfer function is optional.
The optional parameter TD is a delay time expressed in seconds. The Delay
operator is the first block of the control link chain and acts on the controlling
signal. The minimum delay is corresponding to TSTEP (specified in the .TRAN
statement) even if the input parameter TD is omitted or set to a value < TSTEP.
This approximation can be considered when zero-delay control links are
simulated. Regarding the delay discretization process, both ROUNDING and
INTERPOLATION methods described in 1.2.5 are allowed depending on the
DELAYMETH option set by the user on the DWS input file.
The optional parameter R is the internal resistance (in ohms) and may be
positive (1/GMAX  R  1/GMIN) or negative (-1/GMIN  R  -1/GMAX). If
the parameter R is omitted or set to zero, the default value 1/GMIN will be
assumed (see the .OPTIONS statement).
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Controlled Sources DWS
Chapter 4 4-15
4.7 Static Transfer Functions
.
The input signal of the static transfer function (controlling signal) is a voltage,
expressed in Volts, for Voltage-Controlled Sources, a current, expressed in
Amps, for Current-Controlled Sources or it is a square voltage, expressed in
square Volts, for Multiplying Voltage-Controlled Sources.
The output signal of the static transfer function (unloaded source output
waveform) is a voltage, expressed in Volts, for Voltage Sources, while it is a
current, expressed in Amps, for Current Sources.
Five static transfer functions are available: Linear, Piece-Wise Linear, File,
Threshold and Hysteresis.
4.7.1 Linear Static Transfer Function
.
Syntax: value
V (V)
I (A)
V*V(V )2
V (V)
I (A)
Examples:
E1 2 3 14 1 2.0
H1 4 0 I(RS,15) 0.5K
In Voltage-Controlled Voltage Sources value is the voltage gain.
In Voltage-Controlled Current Sources value is the transconductance in mhos.
In Current-Controlled Voltage Sources value is the transresistance in ohms.
In Current-Controlled Current Sources value is the current gain.
In Multiplying Voltage-Controlled Voltage Sources value is the gain in 1/Volts.
In Multiplying Voltage-Controlled Current Sources value is the gain in
Amps/(square Volt).
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Controlled Sources DWS
Chapter 4 4-16
4.7.2 Piece-Wise Linear Static Transfer Function
.
Syntax: PWL( X1 Y1 X2 Y2 <X3 Y3 <X4 Y4 ... <X199 Y199
<X200 Y200>>>> )
X1 X2 X3
X4 X5
Y1
Y2 Y3
Y4 Y5
V (V)
I (A)
V*V(V )2
V (V)
I (A)
Examples:
E1 4 0 10 20 PWL( -1 1 -.0001 1 .0001 -1 1 -1 )
H1 4 0 I(RS,15) PWL( -1 1 -.0001 1 .0001 -1 1 -1 )
This function implements a Piece-Wise Linear (PWL) behavior containing up to
200 breakpoints. Each breakpoint is defined by a pair of values (Xi,Yi). Each pair
of values (Xi, Yi) specifies that the value of the source is Yi (in Volts or Amps) at
controlling signal = Xi. The number of pairs (n) must be 2n200. The value of
the source at intermediate values of controlling signal is determined by using
linear interpolation on the input values.
For controlling signal < X1 the static transfer function keeps the slope related to
the first interval X1 X2, for controlling signal > Xn the static transfer function
keeps the slope related to the last interval Xn-1 Xn. The pairs must be written in
order of increasing controlling signal values (Xi  Xi+1) otherwise an error
message is issued.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Controlled Sources DWS
Chapter 4 4-17
4.7.3 File Static Transfer Function
.
Syntax: FILE( filename )
Y1
Y0
0
Y2
Y3
Yn
X 2X 3X nX
V (V)
I (A)
V*V(V )2
V (V)
I (A)
Example:
E1 4 0 10 20 FILE( stfsamples )
H1 4 0 I(RS,15) FILE( stfsamples )
This function implements a static transfer behavior described by a DWS-format
file identified by the parameter filename. In this file the sampling time-step value
is assumed as the independent variable step. The value of the source at
intermediate values of controlling signal is determined by using linear
interpolation.
For controlling signal < controlling signal of the first sample the static transfer
function keeps the slope related to the interval between the first two samples, for
controlling signal > controlling signal of the last sample the static transfer
function keeps the slope related to the interval between the last two samples.
File name must begin with a letter. Strings beginning with 'DC' or 'dc' are invalid
file names since these strings are interpreted as the DC parameter of an
independent source.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Controlled Sources DWS
Chapter 4 4-18
4.7.4 Threshold Static Transfer Function
.
Syntax: THR( XT Y1 Y2 )
Y2
Y1
XT V (V)
I (A)
V*V(V )2
V (V)
I (A)
Examples:
E1 4 0 10 20 THR( 10 1 2 ) 1NS 50
H1 4 0 I(RS,15) THR( 10MA 1 2 ) 1NS
This function implements a static transfer behavior described by an ideal
threshold. The parameter XT is the input threshold (in Volts, Amps or square
Volts). For controlling signal < XT the source assumes the value Y1 (in Volts or
Amps), while for controlling signal  XT the source assumes the value Y2 (in
Volts or Amps).
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Controlled Sources DWS
Chapter 4 4-19
4.7.5 Hysteresis Static Transfer Function
.
Syntax: HYST( XT1 XT2 Y1 Y2 )
Y2
Y1
XT2XT1 V (V)
I (A)
V*V(V )2
V (V)
I (A)
Examples:
E1 4 0 10 20 HYST( 0 10 1 2 ) 1NS
H1 4 0 I(RS,15) HYST( 0 10MA 1 2 ) 1NS 100
This function implements a static transfer behavior described by an ideal
hysteresis cycle. The parameters XT1 and XT2 are the input thresholds (in Volts,
Amps or square Volts). For controlling signal < XT1 the source assumes the
value Y1 (in Volts or Amps), while for controlling signal > XT2 the source
assumes the value Y2 (in Volts or Amps). In the interval between XT1 and XT2
the source assumes the value Y1 if the controlling signal is increasing from
values < XT1 to values > XT1, while the source assumes the value Y2 if the
controlling signal is decreasing from values > XT2 to values < XT2.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Controlled Sources DWS
Chapter 4 4-20
4.8 Dynamic Transfer Functions for Voltage or
Current-Controlled Sources
.
The dynamic transfer function is a linear, time-invariant transformation that can
be performed in the control link chain after the delay operator and before the
static function. Its behavior can be described in three different ways:
- In time-domain by means of its unit-step response s(t). This can implement the
so called BTM (Behavioral Time Modeling) technique to obtain models directly
in time-domain.
- In the s-plane by means of its transfer response H(s) defined with poles and
zeros in the complex frequency domain (s-plane).
- In the z-plane by means of its transfer response H(z) defined with poles and
zeros in the digital complex frequency domain (z-plane).
DWS transforms any of these description forms into discretized time transfer
functions with a time step corresponding to that chosen by the user for the
simulation (TSTEP).
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Controlled Sources DWS
Chapter 4 4-21
4.8.1 Unit-step Dynamic Response
..
The time-domain unit-step response can be described in the two DWS standard
ways: Piece-Wise Linear or File.
- Piece-Wise Linear
Syntax: s(t) = PWL( X1 Y1 X2 Y2 <X3 Y3 <X4 Y4 ...
<X199 Y199 <X200 Y200>>>> )
X1 X2 X4 X5 X6
Y2
Y3
Y4 Y5
Y6
t
s(t)
Y1
X3
Examples:
EEX 4 0 10 20 1 s(t)=PWL( 0 .25 1US .5 3US 1 )
HEY 4 0 I(R2,10) THR( 10MA ) s(t)=PWL( 0 .25 1US .5 3US 1 )
In this case the behavior of unit-step response s(t) is given by a PieceWise Linear
behavior containing up to 200 breakpoints. The pairs of values XiYi are the
breakpoint coordinates. Each pair specifies that the value of s(t) is Yi at time = Xi
expressed in seconds. The number of pairs (n) must be 2n200. The value of
s(t) at intermediate time values is determined by using linear interpolation on the
input values.
For time < X1 it is assumed that s(t)=0. For time > Xn it is assumed that s(t)=Yn.
The pairs must be written in order of increasing time values (Xi < Xi+1).
Use note:
As far as possible it is convenient to perform the BTM (Behavioral Time
Modeling) using the PWL fitting of dynamic behaviors because it is the fastest
approach in terms of simulation time. Simulation time is directly proportional to
the number of breakpoints n and inversely proportional to the simulation time
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Controlled Sources DWS
Chapter 4 4-22
step TSTEP. A further advantage (about a factor 2) in simulation speed can be
achieved if the values of time coordinates Xi are chosen as integer multiples of
TSTEP.
- File
Syntax: s(t) = FILE( filename )
t
s(t)
Extracted
pure
delay
T
TSTEP
file samples
sampled values
Examples:
EEY 4 0 10 20 1 s(t) = FILE( srsamples )
HEX 4 0 I(R2,10) 1 s(t) = FILE( srsamples )
In this case the behavior of unit-step response is given by its n samples s(kT),
0kn-1, at fixed step (T) contained in the DWS-format file identified by the
parameter filename. File name must begin with a letter. Strings beginning with
'DC' or 'dc' are invalid file names since these strings are interpreted as the DC
parameter of an independent source.
The value of s(t) after the last sample contained in the file is assumed to hold the
value of the last sample. During the simulation loop, DWS performs a time-
convolution process involving coefficients obtained sampling the file contents at
simulation time step (TSTEP). If TSTEP is not coincident with the file time step
T, these coefficients will be calculated by means of linear interpolation between
file samples.
User note:
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Controlled Sources DWS
Chapter 4 4-23
The file representation of dynamic behavior is the most direct and accurate way
to perform BTM, because DWS outputs coming from simulation or time-domain
measure can be utilized without processing. Nevertheless its use can become
more time-consuming than PWL due to time-convolution, that causes a quadratic
growth of simulation time versus the inverse of simulation time step (1/TSTEP).
Therefore, whenever possible, it is advisable to choose piece-wise-linear step
response descriptions, which guarantee linear growth of simulation time versus
sampling frequency.
In case the file description is utilized for accuracy reasons despite its computing
requirement, it is suggested to extract the possible pure delay component of s(t)
and place it into the delay operator provided in the control link chain, in order to
limit the number of convolution coefficients as far as possible.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Controlled Sources DWS
Chapter 4 4-24
4.8.2 S-plane Dynamic Transfer Function
..
Syntax: H(s) = ZEROS( Rez1 Imz1 ... Rezm Imzm ) POLES( Rep1 Imp1 ...
Repn Impn ) H0=value
Examples:
EEHS 4 0 10 20 1 H(s) = ZEROS( 0 1 ) POLES( -50K 0
-1K 25MEG ) H0=5
HEHS 4 0 I(R2,10) 1 H(s) = ZEROS( 0 1 ) POLES( -50K 0
-1K 25MEG ) H0=5
The behavior of the dynamic response is described in the complex frequency
plane (s) through its pole/zero representation expressed in the following general
form:
H(s) = K
(s-s ) ... (s-s )(s-s )(s-s ) ... (s-s )(s-s )
(s-s ) ... (s-s )(s-s )(s-s ) ... (s-s )(s-s )
z1 zr z,r+1 z,r+1
*
zm zm
*
p1 pq p,q+1 p,q+1*
pn pn
*
where:
szi = Rezi is the generic real zero,
szi = Rezi + jImzi and szi* = Rezi - jImzi are the generic couple of complex
conjugate zeros,
spi = Repi is the generic real pole,
spi = Repi + jImpi and spi* = Repi - jImpi are the generic couple of complex
conjugate poles
j

Re ,Im
Re ,-Im
Re ,Im
Re ,-Im
Re ,0
Re ,0
pi
zi
pi
pi
pi pi
zi zi
zi zi
real zero
real pole
complex conjugate zeros
complex conjugate poles
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Controlled Sources DWS
Chapter 4 4-25
The zeros (poles) in the s-plane are defined by a maximum of 10 pairs of values.
No particular ordering of these values is required. Every pair (Rei,Imi) represents
either a real root (in which case Imi=0 and Rei is the root value expressed in
1/second) or a pair of complex roots Rei+jImi, Rei-jImi (Rei expressed in
1/second and Imi expressed in radians/second).
For stable systems all poles must lie in the left half-plane ( < 0) so that Repi < 0.
H0 is the steady state value of the dynamic transfer function. More precisely, if k
is the number of zeros in the origin, H(s)=H'(s)*sk with H'(0) not null neither
infinite, then:
= H'(0) = K
(-s ) ...(-s )|-s | ... |-s |
(-s ) ...(-s )|-s | ... |-s |
z1 z,r+1-k z,m-k
p1 pq p,q+1 pn
z,r-k
2
2 2
2
H0
As any H(s) transfer function is subject to a bilinear transformation with
sampling period T equal to the time step chosen for simulation TSTEP, the
frequency response of the filter actually simulated by DWS is a warped version
of that described by H(s), according to the nonlinear frequency transformation
 = 2/T * tan(T/2)
where  is the frequency (in radians/second) of the actually simulated filter and
 is the corresponding frequency of the filter with H(s) response. This nonlinear
relationship is to be taken into account whenever an H(s) description is used.
When working with small simulation time step (TSTEP), some well known
numerical troubles can arise due to rounding errors of signals and coefficients.
Before starting the simulation, DWS automatically evaluates this possibility and,
if potential troubles are detected, a specific warning message will be issued at
standard output.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Controlled Sources DWS
Chapter 4 4-26
4.8.3 Z-plane Dynamic Transfer Function
.
Syntax: H(z) = ZEROS( Rez1 Imz1 ... Rezm Imzm ) POLES( Rep1 Imp1 ...
Repn Impn ) H0=value T=value
Examples:
EEHZ 4 0 10 20 1 H(z) = ZEROS( 0 1 ) POLES( 50M 0 ) H0=5
T=1US
HEHZ 4 0 I(R2,10) 1 H(z) = ZEROS( 0 1 ) POLES( 50M 0 )
H0=5 T=1MS
The behavior of the dynamic response is described in the digital complex plane z
through its pole/zero representation expressed in the general form:
H(z) = K
(z-z ) ... (z-z )(z-z )(z-z ) ... (z-z )(z-z )
(z-z ) ... (z-z )(z-z )(z-z ) ... (z-z )(z-z )
z1 zr z,r+1 z,r+1
*
zm zm
*
p1 pq p,q+1 p,q+1
*
pn pn
*
where:
zzi = Rezi is the generic real zero,
zzi = Rezi + jImzi and zzi* = Rezi - jImzi are the generic couple of complex
conjugate zeros,
zpi = Repi is the generic real pole,
zpi = Repi + jImpi and zpi* = Repi - jImpi are the generic couple of complex
conjugate poles
Re ,0zi
Re ,-Impi pi
Re ,0pi
Re ,Impi pi
Re ,Imzi zi
Re ,-Imzi zi
real zero real pole
complex conjugate
complex conjugate
zeros
poles
z = -1
( = )
z = 1
 ( = 0 )
Im[z]
Re[z]
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Controlled Sources DWS
Chapter 4 4-27
The zeros (poles) in the z-plane are defined by a maximum of 10 pairs of values.
No particular ordering of these values is required. Every pair (Rei,Imi) represents
either a real root (in which case Imi=0 and Rei is the root value) or a pair of
complex roots Rei+jImi, Rei-jImi.
For stable systems all zeros and poles must lie within the unit circle.
H0 is the zero frequency value (z=1) of the dynamic transfer function. More
precisely, if k is the number of zeros for z=1, H(z)=H'(z)*(z-1)k with H'(1) not
null neither infinite, then H0=H'(1).
T is the sampling period (in seconds) that has been used to time discretize the
dynamic transfer function.
DWS 8.5 USER MANUAL
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
S-Parameter Elements DWS
Chapter 5 5-1
Chapter 5
S - P a r a m e t e r E l e m e n t s .
5. 5
5.1 Introduction to S-Parameter Elements
5.2 1-Port Elements Defined by S-Parameters
5.3 2-Port Elements Defined by S-Parameters
5.4 3-Port Elements Defined by S-Parameters
5.5 4-Port Elements Defined by S-Parameters
5.6 S-Parameter Description
5.6.1 Piece-Wise Linear S-Parameter Description
5.6.2 File S-Parameter Description
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
S-Parameter Elements DWS
Chapter 5 5-2
5.1 Introduction to S-Parameter Elements
The electrical behavior of a k-port circuit element can be completely described
by the kxk matrix (Sij) of its scattering parameters (S-parameters), after having
defined a reference impedance at each port. S-parameters are usually expressed
either in the complex frequency plane (Sij(s)) or in the time domain (Sij(t)).
In the complex frequency plane, each S-parameter is defined via the equation
Sij=bi/aj where bi is the reflected wave at port i and aj is the incident wave at
port j when all ports are terminated on the reference impedance (ak=0 for kj).
Z0
Z0
Z0
Z0
Z0
1
2
i
j
n
a
ib
j
CIRCUIT
BLOCK
DWS offers the possibility to describe circuit blocks by means of their scattering
parameters. This extends the capability of BTM (Behavioral Time Modeling),
because each S-parameter can be defined by its time-behavior when the input
port is stimulated by a unit-step wave. This also corresponds to the measurement
of TDR (Time Domain Reflection) or TDT (Time Domain Transmission) waves,
so that a direct link can be established with wideband instrumentation for
accurate modeling of physical devices.
S-parameter time-behaviors are described in the standard DWS formats including
FILE , where the waveform is carried by a standard DWS output file, and PWL
when the waveform can be fitted by means of a piece-wise linear behavior.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
S-Parameter Elements DWS
Chapter 5 5-3
User note.
To avoid troubles in defining port reference impedance, DWS implements the S-
parameter elements adding at each port a "short" transmission line of impedance
Z0 and with a delay corresponding to TSTEP/2.
Z0
Intrinsic
block
TD=TSTEP/2
N1
N2
N3
N4
N4'
N3'
N2'
N1'
DWS implementation of n-port block described by its S-parameters.
In order to minimize the delay error in signal transmission through ports, the
delay of transmission S-parameters is automatically decreased of TSTEP.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
S-Parameter Elements DWS
Chapter 5 5-4
5.2 1-Port Elements Defined by S-Parameters
Z0
S11
a
b
port N
N
1-port
General form:
BXXXXXXX N 0 S11=sdesc
N and ground are the nodes defining the element port. Positive current is
assumed to flow from N to ground.
sdesc is the S-parameter description (see 5.6).
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
S-Parameter Elements DWS
Chapter 5 5-5
5.3 2-Port Elements Defined by S-Parameters
Z01
a1
b1
port N1 S11
Z02
b2
a2
port N2S22
S21
S12
N1
N2
2-port
General form:
BXXXXXXX N1 0 N2 0 S11=sdesc S21=sdesc S12=sdesc S22=sdesc
N1 and ground are the nodes at port 1; N2 and ground are the nodes at port 2.
Positive current is assumed to flow from N1 to ground and from N2 to ground.
sdesc is the S-parameter description (see 5.6). Reference impedance at the two
ports must be the same.
If the element is reciprocal, i.e. S12=S21, the general form is:
BXXXXXXX N1 0 N2 0 S11=sdesc S21=sdesc S22=sdesc
If the element is symmetrical, i.e. S22=S11 and S12=S21, the general form is:
BXXXXXXX N1 0 N2 0 S11=sdesc S21=sdesc
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
S-Parameter Elements DWS
Chapter 5 5-6
5.4 3-Port Elements Defined by S-Parameters
N1 N2
3-port
N3
General form:
BXXXXXXX N1 0 N2 0 N3 0 S11=sdesc S21=sdesc S31=sdesc
S12=sdesc S22=sdesc S32=sdesc S13=sdesc S23=sdesc S33=sdesc
N1 and ground are the nodes at port 1; N2 and ground are the nodes at port 2. N3
and ground are the nodes at port 3.
Positive current is assumed to flow from N1 to ground, from N2 to ground and
from N3 to ground.
sdesc is the S-parameter description (see 5.6). Reference impedance at the three
ports must be the same.
If the element is reciprocal, i.e. S12=S21, S13=S31 and S23=S32, the general
form is:
BXXXXXXX N1 0 N2 0 N3 0 S11=sdesc S21=sdesc S31=sdesc
S22=sdesc S32=sdesc S33=sdesc
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
S-Parameter Elements DWS
Chapter 5 5-7
5.5 4-Port Elements Defined by S-Parameters
N1 N2
4-port
N3 N4
General form:
BXXXXXXX N1 0 N2 0 N3 0 N4 0 S11=sdesc S21=sdesc S31=sdesc
S41=sdesc S12=sdesc S22=sdesc S32=sdesc S42=sdesc S13=sdesc
S23=sdesc S33=sdesc S43=sdesc S14=sdesc S24=sdesc S34=sdesc
S44=sdesc
N1 and ground are the nodes at port 1; N2 and ground are the nodes at port 2. N3
and ground are the nodes at port 3; N4 and ground are the nodes at port 4.
Positive current is assumed to flow from N1 to ground, from N2 to ground, from
N3 to ground and from N4 to ground.
sdesc is the S-parameter description (see 5.6). Reference impedance at the four
ports must be the same.
If the element is reciprocal, i.e. S12=S21, S13=S31, S23=S32, S14=S41,
S24=S42 and S34=S43, the general form is:
BXXXXXXX N1 0 N2 0 N3 0 N4 0 S11=sdesc S21=sdesc S31=sdesc
S41=sdesc S22=sdesc S32=sdesc S42=sdesc S33=sdesc S43=sdesc
S44=sdesc
If the element is symmetrical, i.e. S11=S22=S33=S44, S21=S12=S43=S34,
S31=S42=S13=S24 and S41=S32=S23=S14, the general form is:
BXXXXXXX N1 0 N2 0 N3 0 N4 0 S11=sdesc S21=sdesc S31=sdesc
S41=sdesc
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
S-Parameter Elements DWS
Chapter 5 5-8
5.6 S-Parameter Description
.
DWS allows the user to describe S-parameters in the time domain (sdesc=Sij(t)).
Sij(t) can be given in the two DWS standard ways: Piece-Wise Linear or File.
5.6.1 Piece-Wise Linear S-Parameter Description
Syntax:
PWL( X1 Y1 X2 Y2 <X3 Y3 <X4 Y4 ... <X199 Y199
<X200 Y200>>>> ) <Z0=value> <TD=value>
Example:
B1 4 0 S11=PWL( 0 0 .1NS .1 .5NS .32 1.5NS .76 3NS 1 )
Z0=50
The optional parameters have the following meaning:
parameters default values units
Z0 (reference impedance of port) 50 ohms
TD (pure delay of S-parameter response) TSTEP seconds
In this case the S-parameter description is given by a Piece-Wise Linear behavior
containing up to 200 breakpoints. The pairs of values Xk,Yk are the breakpoint
coordinates. Each pair specifies that the value of Sij(t) is Yk at time = Xk+TD
expressed in seconds. The number of pairs (n) must be 2n200. The value of
Sij(t) at intermediate time values is determined by using linear interpolation. For
time < X1+TD it is assumed that Sij(t)=0. For time > Xn+TD it is assumed that
Sij(t)=Yn. The pairs must be written in order of increasing time values (Xk <
Xk+1). If this condition is not satisfied (i.e. the response has an infinite slope
point), a fatal error occurs. Actually, the optional parameter TD enables the user
to express a pure delay time between the incident wave at a port and the start of
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
S-Parameter Elements DWS
Chapter 5 5-9
the reflected wave at the same port (Sii parameters) or of the transmitted wave at
the other ports (Sij parameters). TD will be dealt with in two different modes
according to the DELAYMETH option statement as shown in 1.2.5. If TD is
omitted or set to a value < TSTEP, the discretized delay will be equal to TSTEP.
As default TD will be rounded to the closest integer multiple of TSTEP.
User note.
As far as possible it is advisable to perform the BTM (Behavioral Time
Modeling) using the pwl fitting of S-parameters because it is the fastest approach
in terms of simulation time. Simulation time is directly proportional to the
number n of breakpoints and inversely proportional to simulation time step
TSTEP. A further gain (about 2) in simulation speed can be achieved if the
values of time-coordinates Xk are chosen as integer multiples of TSTEP.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
S-Parameter Elements DWS
Chapter 5 5-10
5.6.2 File S-Parameter Description
Syntax:
FILE( filename )
Example:
B1 4 0 S11=FILE( s11.samples )
In this case the behavior of S-parameter is given by its n samples Sij(kT+TD),
0kn-1, at fixed step (T) contained in the DWS-format file identified by the
parameter filename. File name must begin with a letter. Strings beginning with
'DC' or 'dc' are invalid file names since these strings are interpreted as the DC
parameter of an independent source.
This file has an additional line, with the following syntax, after the S-parameter
samples:
Z0=value TD=value
The parameters have the following meaning:
parameters default values units
Z0 (reference impedance of port) no default ohms
TD (pure delay of S-parameter response) no default seconds
The first sample in the file is the value of Sij(TD). The value of Sij(t) for t < TD
is assumed to be 0. The value of Sij(t) for t > TD + nT is assumed to hold the
value of the last sample. Actually, the parameter TD enables the user to express a
pure delay time between the incident wave at a port and the start of the reflected
wave at the same port (Sii parameters) or of the transmitted wave at the other
ports (Sij parameters).
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
S-Parameter Elements DWS
Chapter 5 5-11
TD will be dealt with in two different modes according to the DELAYMETH
option statement as shown in 1.2.5. If TD is set to a value < TSTEP, the
discretized delay will be equal to TSTEP. As default TD will be rounded to the
closest integer multiple of TSTEP.
Optional comments are allowed after the line containing the Z0 and TD values.
Each comment line must have an asterisk "*" as first character of the line.
During the simulation loop, DWS performs a time-convolution process involving
coefficients obtained sampling the file contents with simulation time step
(TSTEP). If TSTEP is not coincident with the file time step (T), these
coefficients will be calculated by means of linear interpolation between file
samples.
User note:
The file representation of S-parameters is the most direct and accurate way to
perform BTM, because DWS outputs coming from simulation or time-domain
measure can be utilized without processing. Nevertheless its use can become
more time-consuming than pwl due to time-convolution, that causes a quadratic
growth of simulation time versus the inverse of simulation time step (1/TSTEP).
Therefore, whenever possible, it is advisable to choose piece-wise-linear
descriptions, which guarantee linear growth of simulation time versus sampling
frequency.
In case the file description is utilized for accuracy reasons despite its computing
requirements, it is better to extract the possible pure delay component of Sij(t)
and add it to the value of the parameter TD, in order to limit the number of
convolution coefficients as far as possible.
DWS 8.5 USER MANUAL
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Adaptors DWS
Chapter 6 6-1
Chapter 6
A d a p t o r s
6. 6
6.1 General Features
6.2 Series Adaptors
6.3 Bimodal Adaptors
6.4 Multimodal Adaptors
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Adaptors DWS
Chapter 6 6-2
6.1 General Features
DWS supports a particular class of multiport elements called adaptors that can
operate useful transformations among port voltages and currents. Adaptors can
be utilized to extend the application range of other DWS elements. Three-port
series adaptors [1] can be utilized to convert a one-port in a two-port element
placed "in series" to a net branch (see also 1.2.3).
Modal adaptors convert variables at physical ports in variables belonging the so
called "modal-domain" and can be utilized to model lossless and lossy
multiconductor transmission lines in a simple way.
[1] A.Fettweis, K.Meerkötter: "On adaptors for wave digital filters", IEEE trans.
on Acoustics, Speech and Signal Processing, vol. ASSP-23, pp.516-525, Dec.
1975.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Adaptors DWS
Chapter 6 6-3
6.2 Series Adaptors
I1 N1 I2
I3
N3
N2
General form:
ASXXXXXX N1 N2 N3
Examples:
AS1 10 20 30
ASRES 5 12 20
N1, N2 and N3 are the port identifiers (nodes). A series adaptor is defined by the
following equalities:
V3 = V1 - V2
I3 = -I1 = I2
A one-port element connected to the N3 node of a series adaptor is converted in
a two-port element connected between the N1 and N2 nodes. For example, the
two statements:
AS 1 2 3
R 3 0 10K
are equivalent to the following statement:
R 1 2 10K
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Adaptors DWS
Chapter 6 6-4
A lumped network, or an actual device modeled with BTM technique by means
of a one-port scattering element, can be placed in series to a branch by means of
a series adaptor, as shown in the following example:
B1PORT
B1PORT
N N1 N2
B1PORTN1 N2
ASB
Series connection of one-port element defined by scattering parameters.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Adaptors DWS
Chapter 6 6-5
6.3 Bimodal Adaptors
Bimodal adaptors convert voltage and current variables at their two "physical
ports" into variables at two modal ports called even (or common) mode port and
odd (or differential) mode port.
N2 NO odd-mode port
N1 NE even-mode port
Physical domain Two-mode domain
I1
I2
V2
V1
IE
IO
VE
VO
General form:
AMXXXXXX N1 N2 NE NO
AMXXXXXX N1 N2 NE NO Z0=value
AMXXXXXX N1 N2 NE NO C=value
AMXXXXXX N1 N2 NE NO L=value
Examples:
AM1 10 20 30 40
AMLINE 5 12 20 70
N1 and N2 are the physical port identifiers. NE and NO are even (common) and
odd (differential) modal port identifiers, respectively.
The following transformation, not depending on port impedance, is performed
between port variables
VE
+V V1 2
2
=
VO
-V V1 2
2
=
IE =
+I I1 2
2
-
IO =
-I I1 2
2
-
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Adaptors DWS
Chapter 6 6-6
If the optional parameters Z0, C or L are not given, the reference impedance at
the ports will be automatically set by the circuit elements connected to the
Bimodal Adaptor. If, due to network topology, the port reference impedance
cannot be defined, one of the three optional parameters must be specified. In this
way an additional transmission line with a delay of TSTEP/2, connected at the
intrinsic Bimodal Adaptor, decouples it from the other elements of the network.
The characteristic impedance of this line may be expressed in one of three forms:
directly as impedance Z0 (ohm), as capacitance C (Farads), so Z0 is set to
TSTEP/(2*C), or as inductance L (Henries), so Z0 is set to 2*L/TSTEP.
Bimodal adaptors can model symmetrical two-conductor coupled transmission
lines by means of a pair of uncoupled lines (lossless or lossy) representing even
and odd mode propagation.
For example, a two-conductor coupled transmission lines can be described to
DWS in the following way:
AM1 1 2 10 20
TLE 10 30 Z0=80 TD=1.01NS
TLO 20 40 Z0=50 TD=1NS
AM2 3 4 30 40
AM1 AM2
TLE/BLE
TLO/BLO
1
2
3
4
TLE and TLO can be replaced by two-port scattering elements to model losses in
a behavioral way, so that direct utilization of odd and even TDR/TDT measures
is possible. When modal propagation velocities are slightly different as usually
happens for non homogeneous dielectric, the use of INTERPOLATION delay
discretization method is recommended (see also 1.2.5).
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Adaptors DWS
Chapter 6 6-7
6.4 Multimodal Adaptors
Multimodal adaptors convert voltage and current variables at their "physical
ports" into variables at their "modal ports". The number of physical ports may
vary in the range from 2 to 100. The number of modal ports equals the number of
physical ports.
Npn Nmn
Np1 Nm1
Physical domain n-mode domain
I1
V1
J1
E1
Np2 Nm2
I2
V2
J2
E2
In
Vn
Jn
En
General form:
AMXXXXXX Np1 ... Npn Nm1 ... Nmn MNAME
AMXXXXXX Np1 ... Npn Nm1 ... Nmn MNAME Z0=value
AMXXXXXX Np1 ... Npn Nm1 ... Nmn MNAME C=value
AMXXXXXX Np1 ... Npn Nm1 ... Nmn MNAME L=value
Examples:
AMPM 10 20 30 110 120 130 MOD1
AMMP 40 50 60 140 150 160 MOD1
The Multimodal Adaptor statement must reference a particular multimodal
adaptor model, described in a .MODEL statement. Np1 ... Npn are the physical
port identifiers. Nm1 ... Nmn are the modal port identifiers.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Adaptors DWS
Chapter 6 6-8
MNAME is the model name. Model name must begin with a letter. Strings
beginning with 'DC' or 'dc' are invalid model names since these strings are
interpreted as the DC parameter of an independent source.
If the optional parameters Z0, C or L are not given, the reference impedance at
the ports will be automatically set by the circuit elements connected to the
Multimodal Adaptor. If, due to network topology, the port reference impedance
cannot be defined, one of the three optional parameters must be specified. In this
way an additional transmission line with a delay of TSTEP/2, connected at the
intrinsic Multimodal Adaptor, decouples it from the other elements of the
network. The characteristic impedance of this line may be expressed in one of
three forms: directly as impedance Z0 (ohm), as capacitance C (Farads), so Z0 is
set to TSTEP/(2*C), or as inductance L (Henries), so Z0 is set to 2*L/TSTEP.
- Multimodal Adaptor Parameters in .MODEL Statement
The multimodal adaptor parameters are specified in a .MODEL statement. This
statement may take one of the two following forms:
1) .MODEL MNAME AM n ROW=(v11 ... vn1) ... ROW=(v1n ... vnn)
where:
MNAME is the model name;
AM is the keyword specifying that the .MODEL statement refers to
multimodal adaptors;
n is the number of physical ports;
vij represents the i,j element of the nxn voltage eigenvector matrix defining
the voltage transformation.
2) .MODEL MNAME AM FILE( filename )
where filename is the name of an ASCII file containing the voltage eigenvector
matrix. File name must begin with a letter. Strings beginning with 'DC' or 'dc' are
invalid file names since these strings are interpreted as the DC parameter of an
independent source. The general form of the file is the following:
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Adaptors DWS
Chapter 6 6-9
n
v11 ... vn1
... ...
v1n ... vnn
* comments
The following transformation, not depending on port impedance, is performed
between voltages and currents at the physical and modal ports:
V = T E
I = (T ) Jv
t -1
v
where:
v = ( vi ) is the vertical vector of physical port voltages;
E = ( Ei ) is the vertical vector of modal port voltages;
Tv = (vij) is the nxn voltage eigenvector matrix;
I = (Ii ) is the vertical vector of physical port currents;
J = (Ji) is the vertical vector of modal port currents.
Note also that equals the current eigenvector matrix.
Multimodal Adaptors are used to model n-conductor transmission lines in
nonhomogeneous dielectrics by means of n uncoupled lines (lossless or lossy)
representing different propagation modes.
For example, 3-conductor coupled transmission lines can be described to DWS in
the following way:
AM1 1 2 3 10 20 30 LINES_MOD
TL1 10 40 Z0=32.6 TD=1.945NS
TL2 20 50 Z0=26.9 TD=1.731NS
TL3 30 60 Z0=5.0 TD=1.664NS
AM2 4 5 6 40 50 60 LINES_MOD
.MODEL LINES_MOD AM 3 ROW=( 1.0 1.0 1.0 ) ROW=( 1.07 0.0
+ -2.22 ) ROW=( 1.0 -1.0 1.0 )
)v
t -1
T(
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Adaptors DWS
Chapter 6 6-10
TL3
3
TL2
2
AM1 AM2
TL1
1 4
5
6
10
20
30
40
50
60
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Simulation Control Statements DWS
Chapter 8 7-1
Chapter 7
S u b c i r c u i t s a n d C h a i n s
7. 7
7.1 General Features
7.2 Subcircuits
7.2.1 .SUBCKT Statement
7.2.2 .ENDS Statement
7.2.3 Subcircuit Calls
7.3 Chains of Cells
7.3.1 .CELL Statement
7.3.2 .ENDC Statement
7.3.3 Cell Calls
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Simulation Control Statements DWS
Chapter 8 7-2
7.1 General Features
DWS includes some facilities to speed up writing out netlists when repetitive
blocks are included within the network.
Hierarchical circuit description is allowed by subcircuits that operate exactly like
their SPICE counterparts. Subcircuits are a practical method to build up libraries
that can be easily included and used in DWS input files.
In addition, a further utility is included to deal efficiently with the description of
iterative network structures composed by several identical cells connected
together in chain configurations. This chain expansion feature is very useful, for
example to model transmission lines of any length, starting from a basic unit-
length cell described at circuital or behavioral level.
Subcircuits and cells are independent block-definition methods and their only use
limitation is that they cannot be nested together.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Simulation Control Statements DWS
Chapter 8 7-3
7.2 Subcircuits
SUBCKT
N1
N2
N3
Nn
A network block that consists of DWS elements can be defined and referenced as
subcircuit. The subcircuit is defined by a grouping of element statements; the
program then automatically inserts the group of elements wherever the subcircuit
is referenced.
There is no limit on the size or complexity of subcircuits, and subcircuits may
contain other subcircuits without any practical limit of nesting level.
7.2.1 .SUBCKT Statement
General form:
.SUBCKT SUBNAM N1 <N2 N3 ...>
Example:
.SUBCKT OPAMP 1 2 3 4
A subcircuit definition must begin with a .SUBCKT statement. SUBNAM is the
subcircuit name, and N1, N2, ... are the external visible nodes (port identifiers),
which cannot be zero.
The group of element statements which immediately follow the .SUBCKT
statement defines the subcircuit. The last statement in a subcircuit definition is
the .ENDS statement (see below). Control statements and device models may not
appear within a subcircuit definition; however, subcircuit definitions may contain
anything else, including other subcircuit definitions and subcircuit calls (see
below), except cell definitions and cell calls. Note that any subcircuit definitions
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Simulation Control Statements DWS
Chapter 8 7-4
included as part of a subcircuit definition are strictly local (i.e., such definitions
are not known outside the subcircuit definition). Also, any element nodes not
included within the .SUBCKT statement are strictly local, with the exception of
0 (ground) which is always global. For this reason, internal node numbers (port
identifiers) can be reused outside the subcircuit definition.
7.2.2 .ENDS Statement
General form:
.ENDS <SUBNAM>
Example:
.ENDS OPAMP
This statement must be the last one for each subcircuit definition. The subcircuit
name, if included, indicates which subcircuit definition is being terminated for
user documentation.
7.2.3 Subcircuit Calls
General form:
XYYYYYYY N1' <N2' N3' ...> SUBNAM
Example:
X1 2 4 17 3 OPAMP
Subcircuits are used in DWS by specifying pseudo-elements beginning with the
letter X, followed by the circuit nodes to be used in expanding the subcircuit.
In the expanded network the suffix .XYYYYYYY will be added at each element
name of the subcircuit instance .
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Simulation Control Statements DWS
Chapter 8 7-5
7.3 Chains of Cells
Cascade connection (chain) of repetitive blocks (cells) can be quickly described
using .CELL statement for cell definition and .CHAIN statement to build up cell
connections. To be identified, a cell must have at least one input node (port) and
one output node (port). In general, a set of input nodes, a corresponding set of
output nodes and an optional set of visible nodes have to be defined within the
cell definition. The cascade connection of cells will be implemented during
netlist expansion by superimposing the output node of a cell to the corresponding
input node of the next cell in the chain. Intermediate cell inputs will assume the
number (port identifier) of corresponding output node in the expanded netlist. All
expanded chain port identifiers (input, outputs, visible nodes) will be coded with
a numeric suffix corresponding to the position of the instanced cell within the
chain.
input
nodes
output
nodes
Visible nodes
Ni1
V V V
N
N
N
N
N
CELLNAM
i2
ik
1 2 i
o1
o2
ok
A cell can consist of any DWS elements (except subcircuits) and is defined by a
grouping of element statements; the program then automatically inserts the group
of elements wherever the cell is referenced. There is no limit on the size or
complexity of cells.
7.3.1 .CELL Statement
General Form
.CELL CELLNAM N1 <N2 N3 ...>
A cell definition must begin with a .CELL statement. CELLNAM is the cell
name, and N1, N2, ... are all the external nodes, which cannot be zero, including
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Simulation Control Statements DWS
Chapter 8 7-6
inputs, outputs and visible nodes. The group of element statements which
immediately follow the .CELL statement defines the cell. The last statement in a
cell definition is the .ENDC statement (see below). Control statements and
device models may not appear within a cell definition, as cell definitions may
only contain element statements. Any element nodes not included within the
.CELL statement are strictly local, with the exception of 0 (ground) which is
always global.
Multiple nesting of cell definition and nesting of cell definition within subcircuit
definition or viceversa are not allowed.
7.3.2 .ENDC Statement
General form:
.ENDC <CELLNAM>
This statement must be the last one for any cell definition. The cell name is
optional.
7.3.3 Cell Calls
General form:
.CHAIN n*CELLNAM I: Ni1, Ni2, ... ; O: No1, No2, ...
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Simulation Control Statements DWS
Chapter 8 7-7
Cells are used in DWS by specifying .CHAIN statements. Each cell, defined by a
.CELL statement, must be called by only one .CHAIN statement. The number of
cells is 1  n  9999. The assigned name of the I/O nodes in the expanded chain
of cells is Ndddd, where N is an output cell node in .CHAIN statement and dddd
is the current cell number, with the exception of the input nodes of the first cell in
the chain for which the assigned name is Ni0001. The assigned name of the other
external nodes is Ndddd, where N is an external node in .CELL statement.
Some care in node identifier assignement must be taken in order to avoid
unwanted connections in the network topology, because the external nodes in the
expanded chain of cells are visible at the top level of circuit description and the
expansion procedure could compose names already declared at top level.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Simulation Control Statements DWS
Chapter 8 8-8
Chapter 8
S i m u l a t i o n C o n t r o l
S t a t e m e n t s
8. 8
8.1 .OPTIONS Statement
8.2 .TRAN Statement
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Simulation Control Statements DWS
Chapter 8 8-9
8.1 .OPTIONS Statement
Different DWS functioning mode can be selected by means of .OPTIONS
statement, which operates like SPICE .OPTIONS card. If no option is specified,
the default values will be automatically assumed.
General form:
.OPTIONS <GMIN=value> <GMAX=value> <MODLIST>
<DELAYMETH=name>
The limits of conductance range can be modified using GMIN and GMAX
options. GMIN resets the value of GMIN, the minimum conductance allowed by
the program. The default value is 1.0E-9.
GMAX resets the value of GMAX, the maximum conductance allowed by the
program. The default value is 1.0E6.
The use of GMIN and GMAX is specified at each element description.
If MODLIST option is specified, the program lists all model parameters.
DELAYMETH option sets delay discretization method. ROUNDING method
(DELAYMETH=ROUNDING) rounds all user-specified element delays to the
closest time-step multiple value. INTERPOLATION method
(DELAYMETH=INTERPOLATION) linearly interpolates the outputs from the
two time-step multiples delimiting the interval containing the user-specified
delay (see also 1.2.5). If the parameter DELAYMETH is omitted, it is assumed to
be ROUNDING.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Simulation Control Statements DWS
Chapter 8 8-10
8.2 .TRAN Statement
.TRAN statement sets all information regarding simulation time step, simulation
time-window, the maximum number of stored samples and specifies the
identifier of simulated waveforms to be stored in the .g output file (see also
1.2.6).
General form:
.TRAN TSTEP=value TSTOP=value <TSTART=value>
<LIMPTS=value> <UIC> V(N) V(N1,N2) I(elem,N) P(elem,N)
A(elem,N) B(elem,N) Y(elem,N) Z(elem,N) Q(elem,N) R(elem,N)
G(elem,N)
Examples:
.TRAN TSTEP=10PS TSTOP=5NS V(10) P(TLINE,10) Z(TLINE,10)
.TRAN TSTEP=1NS TSTOP=1US TSTART=500NS V(10,20)
I(RTERM,40)
.TRAN TSTEP=100PS TSTOP=100NS LIMPTS=500 UIC V(50)
I(CIN,50)
TSTEP is the user-specified simulation time-step.
TSTOP is the end of simulation time-window.
TSTART is the time at which the simulator begins to save the results of the
analysis. If TSTART is omitted, it is assumed to be zero. The transient analysis
always begins at time zero. In the interval <zero, TSTART>, the circuit is
analyzed (to reach a steady state), but no outputs are stored. In the interval
<TSTART, TSTOP>, the circuit is analyzed and outputs are stored.
LIMPTS is the number of samples per simulated waveform to be stored in the .g
output file at the end of simulation loop.
If LIMPTS = 0 only the last sample of each output waveform will be saved in .g
file.
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Simulation Control Statements DWS
Chapter 8 8-11
If LIMPTS = 1 only the first sample of each output waveform will be saved in .g
file.
If LIMPTS > (TSTOP-TSTART)/TSTEP, the number of stored samples per
waveform is limited to (TSTOP-TSTART)/TSTEP.
If LIMPTS < (TSTOP-TSTART)/TSTEP, stored output samples are obtained by
linear interpolation of simulated values. If LIMPTS is omitted, it is assumed to
be (TSTOP-TSTART)/TSTEP.]
If UIC (Use Initial Conditions) option is specified, the program uses the values
specified using the keyword IC=... on the various elements as the starting
condition for the simulation.
The .TRAN statement specifies also the output waveforms. At all element ports
are available the following variables types:
V(N) : voltage at node (port) N referenced to ground (node 0)
V(N1,N2) : voltage at node (port) N1 referenced to node (port) N2 (differential
voltage)
I(elem,N): input current at port N of element elem
P(elem,N): instantaneous input power at port N of element elem
At ports of elements acting as reference impedance sources are also available the
following variables:
A(elem,N): incident voltage wave at port N of element elem
B(elem,N): reflected voltage wave at port N of element elem
Y(elem,N): reference admittance of port N of element elem
Z(elem,N): reference impedance of port N of element elem ( Z=1/Y )
Q(elem,N): incident instantaneous power at port N of element elem
R(elem,N): reflected instantaneous power at port N of element elem
G(elem,N): B/A ratio at port N of element elem
DWS 8.5 USER MANUAL
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Index DWS
I-1
INDEX
A
adaptor bimodal 6-5
adaptor series 6-3
adaptors 5-1
adaptors multimodal 6-7
algorithm 1-3
amplitude modulation 3-18
B
bimodal adaptors 6-5
binary digit sequence 3-19
burst sequence 3-22
C
capacitor, initial conditions 2-41
cell calls 7-6
CELL statement 7-5
CHAIN statement 7-6
chains of cells 7-5
characteristic impedance 2-47
circuit description 1-16
comments 1-20
Complexity Factor, Cf 1-21
controlled source function 3-18
controlled sources 3-1
current-controlled current sources 4-9
current-controlled resistors 2-24
current-controlled voltage sources 4-7
D
DC resistor function 2-9
DC source function 3-5
decoupling 2-5; 2-7; 2-22; 2-26; 2-49
defining reference impedance 2-49
delay time 2-47
delta resistor function 2-14
delta source function 3-11
description, circuit 1-16
dynamic response, unit-step 2-34; 4-21
dynamic transfer function, S-plane 2-37; 4-24
dynamic transfer function, Z-plane 2-39; 4-26
dynamic transfer functions 2-33; 4-20
E
elements 1-4
En 1-21
ENDC statement 7-6
ENDS statement 7-4
erfc resistor function 2-13
erfc source function 3-10
even mode 2-47
F
file resistor function 2-18
file source function 3-15
file static transfer function 2-30; 4-17
file_name 1-18
format
output 1-18
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Index DWS
I-2
frequency modulation 3-18
H
hysteresis static transfer function 2-32
hysteresis static transfer function 4-19
I
ideal transformers 2-51
independent current sources 3-4
independent source functions 3-5
Independent voltage sources 3-3
inductor, initial conditions 2-43
initial conditions, capacitor 2-41
initial conditions, inductors 2-43
input format 1-17
interpolation 1-3
J
junction diodes 2-53
L
linear capacitors 2-41
linear inductors 2-43
linear resistors 2-3
linear static transfer function 2-28; 4-15
list_of_samples 1-20
M
memory 1-15
modulation 3-18
multiconductor transmission lines 6-2
multimodal adaptors 6-7
multiplying controlled sources 4-11
N
network complexity 1-3; 1-21
network summary 1-21
Nn 1-21
non-linear resistors 2-4
number_of_samples 1-18
number_of_waveforms 1-18
O
odd mode 2-47
option DELAYMETH 1-3
options -r -s 1-22
OPTIONS statement 8-2
output format 1-18
P
passive elements 1-1
periodic sequence 3-22
phase modulation 3-18
Piece-Wise Linear resistors 2-4
piece-wise linear static transfer function 2-29
polynomial resistor 2-11
polynomial source 3-7
port variables 1-4
ports 1-4
PSEQ 3-22
pulse resistor function 2-10
pulse source function 3-6
pulseerfc resistor function 2-12
pulseerfc source function 3-9
pulsefile resistor function 2-19
pulsefile source function 3-16
pulsepoly resistor function 2-11
pulsepoly source function 3-7
PulsePwl resistor function 2-17
PulsePwl source function 3-14
PWL fitting 1-2
PWL resistor function 2-16
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Index DWS
I-3
PWL resistors 2-4
PWL source function 3-13
PWL static transfer function 4-16
R
reference impedance 1-9
report file 1-21
report option 1-22
S
sampling_timestep 1-18
sequence definition 3-20
series adaptor 6-3
silent option 1-22
single sequence 3-21
sinusoidal resistor function 2-15
sinusoidal source function 3-12
S-parameter description 5-8
S-parameter elements 4-1
S-Parameters
four-port elements 5-7
one-port elements 5-4
three-port elements 5-6
two-port elements 5-5
Specific Elapsed Time , SET 1-21
s-plane dynamic transfer function 2-37; 4-24
DWS 1-2
DWS features 1-2
SSEQ 3-21
start_time 1-19
starting DWS 1-22
statement .CELL 7-5
statement .CHAIN 7-6
statement .ENDC 7-6
statement .ENDS 7-4
statement .OPTIONS 8-2
statement .SUBCKT 7-3
statement .TRAN 8-3
static transfer functions 2-28; 4-15
statistics 1-21
subcircuit calls 7-4
SUBCKT statement 7-3
syntax 1-2
T
threshold static transfer function 2-31; 4-18
Time step 1-3
time-controlled resistors 2-6
time-domain characterization 1-2
TRAN Statement 8-3
transmission lines 2-47
transmission lines, Td, Z0 2-47
transmission lines, UIC 2-48
two-port elements 1-6
U
UIC option 2-41; 2-43
unbalanced transmission lines 2-45
unit delays 1-5
unit-delay transmission lines 2-49
unit-step dynamic response 2-34; 4-21
V
variable summary 1-21
voltage-controlled current sources 4-5
voltage-controlled resistors 2-20
voltage-controlled voltage sources 4-3
W
wave equations 1-4
waveform_name 1-19
Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino
Index DWS
I-4
Z z-plane dynamic transfer function 2-39

More Related Content

PDF
Spicy Schematics Facebook Post Collection_Nov. 2012- Feb. 2015
PDF
Dws 8.4 manual_final_27012013
PDF
2013 06 swan_dws_story_pb_090613
PDF
Swan dws story_270113_pb_google_drive
PDF
2012 dws story_220812
PPTX
PPTX
pulse and digital circuits-pulse and digital circuits
PDF
Diseño de Amplificadores de potencia de audio.pdf
Spicy Schematics Facebook Post Collection_Nov. 2012- Feb. 2015
Dws 8.4 manual_final_27012013
2013 06 swan_dws_story_pb_090613
Swan dws story_270113_pb_google_drive
2012 dws story_220812
pulse and digital circuits-pulse and digital circuits
Diseño de Amplificadores de potencia de audio.pdf

Similar to DWS 8.5 USER MANUAL (20)

PPT
Oscilloscope tutorial
PPTX
Basic electrical and electronics engineering
PPTX
Resonant Converter
PPTX
Emi unit iii ppt
PPTX
Emi cathode ray oscilloscope
PPTX
1.Oscilloscope. 2.Block diagram of Oscilloscope. 3.Types of Oscilloscope. 4.A...
PDF
manual-pe-2017_compress.pdf
PDF
Dafx (digital audio-effects)
PPTX
Lecture 4 PPT Sensors and Actuators Shibu K V.pptx
PDF
The Class-D Amplifier
PDF
Passive and active devices
PDF
Simulink4 beginners
PDF
Microwave and Wireless Synthesizers Theory and Design 2nd Edition Ulrich L. R...
PPT
class5_ oscilloscope intro __lecture.ppt
PPTX
Sound amplification
PDF
Circuitikzmanual
PDF
10 win-mech-iv-rev-ie
PDF
Wideband Circuit Design First Edition Carlin Herbert J
PDF
Pdpm,mayank awasthi,jabalpur,i it kanpur, servo motor,keil code
DOCX
CRO and functional generator physics
Oscilloscope tutorial
Basic electrical and electronics engineering
Resonant Converter
Emi unit iii ppt
Emi cathode ray oscilloscope
1.Oscilloscope. 2.Block diagram of Oscilloscope. 3.Types of Oscilloscope. 4.A...
manual-pe-2017_compress.pdf
Dafx (digital audio-effects)
Lecture 4 PPT Sensors and Actuators Shibu K V.pptx
The Class-D Amplifier
Passive and active devices
Simulink4 beginners
Microwave and Wireless Synthesizers Theory and Design 2nd Edition Ulrich L. R...
class5_ oscilloscope intro __lecture.ppt
Sound amplification
Circuitikzmanual
10 win-mech-iv-rev-ie
Wideband Circuit Design First Edition Carlin Herbert J
Pdpm,mayank awasthi,jabalpur,i it kanpur, servo motor,keil code
CRO and functional generator physics
Ad

More from Piero Belforte (20)

PDF
Simulation-modeling matrix
PDF
Frequency domain behavior of S-parameters piecewise-linear fitting in a digit...
PDF
3 experimental wideband_characterization_of_a parallel-plate_capacitor
PDF
Automated Piecewise-Linear Fitting of S-Parameters step-response (PWLFIT) for...
PDF
Cseltmuseum post records from September 2018 to January2019
PDF
Cseltmuseum post records August2018
PDF
Cseltmuseum post records July 2018
PDF
Multigigabit modeling of hi safe+ flying probe fp011
PDF
Cseltmuseum post records June 2018
PDF
CSELTMUSEUM POST RECORDS MAY 2018
PDF
CSELTMUSEUM POST RECORDS APRIL 2018
PDF
CSELTMUSEUM post records March_2018
PDF
CSELTMUSEUM POST RECORDS FEBRUARY 2018
PDF
CSELTMUSEUM POST RECORDS JANUARY 2018
PDF
CSELTMUSEUM expanded post records, December 2017
PDF
HDT (High Design Technology) related content on Cseltmuseum Dec. 13 2017
PDF
HiSAFE related content on Cseltmuseum Dec. 13 2017
PDF
CSELTMUSEUM post record August to December 2017
PDF
Piero Belforte related presentations on slideplayer.com july 12 2017
PDF
Collection of Cselt related presentations on slideplayer.com by_Piero_Belfort...
Simulation-modeling matrix
Frequency domain behavior of S-parameters piecewise-linear fitting in a digit...
3 experimental wideband_characterization_of_a parallel-plate_capacitor
Automated Piecewise-Linear Fitting of S-Parameters step-response (PWLFIT) for...
Cseltmuseum post records from September 2018 to January2019
Cseltmuseum post records August2018
Cseltmuseum post records July 2018
Multigigabit modeling of hi safe+ flying probe fp011
Cseltmuseum post records June 2018
CSELTMUSEUM POST RECORDS MAY 2018
CSELTMUSEUM POST RECORDS APRIL 2018
CSELTMUSEUM post records March_2018
CSELTMUSEUM POST RECORDS FEBRUARY 2018
CSELTMUSEUM POST RECORDS JANUARY 2018
CSELTMUSEUM expanded post records, December 2017
HDT (High Design Technology) related content on Cseltmuseum Dec. 13 2017
HiSAFE related content on Cseltmuseum Dec. 13 2017
CSELTMUSEUM post record August to December 2017
Piero Belforte related presentations on slideplayer.com july 12 2017
Collection of Cselt related presentations on slideplayer.com by_Piero_Belfort...
Ad

Recently uploaded (20)

PDF
Optimiser vos workloads AI/ML sur Amazon EC2 et AWS Graviton
PDF
MIND Revenue Release Quarter 2 2025 Press Release
PPTX
SOPHOS-XG Firewall Administrator PPT.pptx
PPTX
20250228 LYD VKU AI Blended-Learning.pptx
PDF
Advanced methodologies resolving dimensionality complications for autism neur...
PPTX
A Presentation on Artificial Intelligence
PPTX
Group 1 Presentation -Planning and Decision Making .pptx
PDF
Mobile App Security Testing_ A Comprehensive Guide.pdf
PDF
Building Integrated photovoltaic BIPV_UPV.pdf
PDF
NewMind AI Weekly Chronicles - August'25-Week II
PDF
Network Security Unit 5.pdf for BCA BBA.
PDF
gpt5_lecture_notes_comprehensive_20250812015547.pdf
PDF
A comparative analysis of optical character recognition models for extracting...
PDF
Unlocking AI with Model Context Protocol (MCP)
PDF
Encapsulation theory and applications.pdf
PDF
Reach Out and Touch Someone: Haptics and Empathic Computing
PDF
Spectral efficient network and resource selection model in 5G networks
PPTX
1. Introduction to Computer Programming.pptx
PDF
Encapsulation_ Review paper, used for researhc scholars
PDF
Empathic Computing: Creating Shared Understanding
Optimiser vos workloads AI/ML sur Amazon EC2 et AWS Graviton
MIND Revenue Release Quarter 2 2025 Press Release
SOPHOS-XG Firewall Administrator PPT.pptx
20250228 LYD VKU AI Blended-Learning.pptx
Advanced methodologies resolving dimensionality complications for autism neur...
A Presentation on Artificial Intelligence
Group 1 Presentation -Planning and Decision Making .pptx
Mobile App Security Testing_ A Comprehensive Guide.pdf
Building Integrated photovoltaic BIPV_UPV.pdf
NewMind AI Weekly Chronicles - August'25-Week II
Network Security Unit 5.pdf for BCA BBA.
gpt5_lecture_notes_comprehensive_20250812015547.pdf
A comparative analysis of optical character recognition models for extracting...
Unlocking AI with Model Context Protocol (MCP)
Encapsulation theory and applications.pdf
Reach Out and Touch Someone: Haptics and Empathic Computing
Spectral efficient network and resource selection model in 5G networks
1. Introduction to Computer Programming.pptx
Encapsulation_ Review paper, used for researhc scholars
Empathic Computing: Creating Shared Understanding

DWS 8.5 USER MANUAL

  • 1. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino i DWS Digital Wave Simulator R E L E A S E 8 . 5 USER'S MANUAL
  • 2. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino ii Copyright 1985 – 2015 Piero Belforte, Giancarlo Guaschino This document contains proprietary information of Piero Belforte and Giancarlo Guaschino, Torino, Italy. DWS (Digital Wave Simulator) is a trademark of Piero Belforte and Giancarlo Guaschino. DWV (Digital Wave Viewer) is a trademark of Piero Belforte and Giancarlo Guaschino. SWAN (Simulation by Wave ANalysis) is a trademark of Piero Belforte. All rights are reserved. The contents of this document may not be copied or reproduced in any form without the express prior permission of Piero Belforte and Giancarlo Guaschino. Piero Belforte and Giancarlo Guaschino shall not be liable for errors contained herein and the information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. The authors wish to thank their friend Flavio Maggioni for his important contribution to the early edition of this manual. Piero Belforte's info can be found at http://www.linkedin.com/in/pierobelforte An up-to-date list of DWS related web publications is also available at this link. SWAN/DWS project story is available here: SWAN Story An online version of DWS with a schematic capture is available both as Web and mobile applications: Spicy SWAN.
  • 3. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino iii
  • 5. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Table of Contents DWS v TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS ............................................................................................................V CHAPTER 1. GENERAL FEATURES............................................................................... 1-1 1.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................. 1-2 1.2 GENERAL USE CONSIDERATIONS ................................................................................... 1-4 1.2.1 Time Step.............................................................................................................. 1-4 1.2.2 Elements............................................................................................................... 1-5 1.2.3 Two-Port Element Conversion .............................................................................. 1-7 1.2.4 Reference Impedance...........................................................................................1-10 1.2.5 Delay Discretization............................................................................................1-11 1.2.6 DWS Operation ...................................................................................................1-13 1.2.7 Memory Requirements.........................................................................................1-15 1.3 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1-16 1.4 INPUT FORMAT ............................................................................................................1-17 1.5 OUTPUT FILE ...............................................................................................................1-18 1.6 REPORT FILE ...............................................................................................................1-21 1.7 STARTING DWS...........................................................................................................1-22 CHAPTER 2. PASSIVE ELEMENTS................................................................................. 2-1 2.1 LINEAR RESISTORS ....................................................................................................... 2-3 2.2 PIECE-WISE LINEAR RESISTORS .................................................................................... 2-4 2.3 TIME-CONTROLLED LINEAR RESISTORS......................................................................... 2-6 2.3.1 DC Resistor Function ........................................................................................... 2-9 2.3.2 Pulse Resistor Function .......................................................................................2-10 2.3.3 PulsePoly Resistor Function ...............................................................................2-11 2.3.4 PulseErfc Resistor Function.................................................................................2-12 2.3.5 Erfc Resistor Function.........................................................................................2-13 2.3.6 Delta Resistor Function .......................................................................................2-14 2.3.7 Sinusoidal Resistor Function................................................................................2-15 2.3.8 Piece-Wise Linear Resistor Function....................................................................2-16 2.3.9 PulsePwl Resistor Function .................................................................................2-17 2.3.10 File Resistor Function........................................................................................2-18 2.3.11 PulseFile Resistor Function ...............................................................................2-19
  • 6. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Table of Contents DWS vi 2.4 VOLTAGE-CONTROLLED RESISTORS.............................................................................2-21 2.5 CURRENT-CONTROLLED RESISTORS .............................................................................2-25 2.6 STATIC TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FOR VOLTAGE OR CURRENT-CONTROLLED RESISTORS ...2-29 2.6.1 Linear Static Transfer Function ..........................................................................2-29 2.6.2 Piece-Wise Linear Static Transfer Function.........................................................2-30 2.6.3 File Static Transfer Function...............................................................................2-31 2.6.4 Threshold Static Transfer Function......................................................................2-32 2.6.5 Hysteresis Static Transfer Function .....................................................................2-33 2.7 DYNAMIC TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FOR VOLTAGE OR CURRENT-CONTROLLED RESISTORS2-34 2.7.1 Unit-step Dynamic Response ...............................................................................2-35 2.7.2 S-plane Dynamic Transfer Function.....................................................................2-38 2.7.3 Z-plane Dynamic Transfer Function ....................................................................2-40 2.8 LINEAR CAPACITORS ...................................................................................................2-42 2.9 LINEAR INDUCTORS .....................................................................................................2-44 2.10 COUPLED INDUCTORS ................................................................................................2-46 2.11 UNBALANCED TRANSMISSION LINES ..........................................................................2-48 2.12 BALANCED TRANSMISSION LINES...............................................................................2-50 2.13 UNIT-DELAY TRANSMISSION LINES............................................................................2-52 2.14 IDEAL TRANSFORMERS ..............................................................................................2-54 2.15 JUNCTION DIODES......................................................................................................2-56 CHAPTER 3. INDEPENDENT SOURCES .........................................................................3-1 3.1 INDEPENDENT VOLTAGE SOURCES (THEVENIN EQUIVALENT)..........................................3-3 3.2 INDEPENDENT CURRENT SOURCES (NORTON EQUIVALENT) ............................................3-4 3.3 INDEPENDENT SOURCE FUNCTIONS ................................................................................3-5 3.3.1 DC Source Function..............................................................................................3-5 3.3.2 Pulse Source Function...........................................................................................3-6 3.3.3 PulsePoly Source Function...................................................................................3-7 3.3.4 PulseErfc Source Function ....................................................................................3-9 3.3.5 Erfc Source Function...........................................................................................3-10 3.3.6 Delta Source Function.........................................................................................3-11 3.3.7 Sinusoidal Source Function .................................................................................3-12 3.3.8 Piece-Wise Linear Source Function .....................................................................3-13 3.3.9 PulsePwl Source Function...................................................................................3-14 3.3.10 File Source Function .........................................................................................3-15 3.3.11 PulseFile Source Function.................................................................................3-16 3.4 SOURCE FUNCTIONS WITH A PARAMETER CONTROLLED BY A NODE VOLTAGE...............3-18
  • 7. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Table of Contents DWS vii 3.5 BINARY DIGIT SEQUENCE ............................................................................................3-19 3.5.1 Sequence Definition.............................................................................................3-20 3.5.2 Single Sequence...................................................................................................3-21 3.5.3 Periodic Sequence ...............................................................................................3-22 3.5.4 Burst Sequence....................................................................................................3-22 CHAPTER 4. CONTROLLED SOURCES......................................................................... 4-1 4.1 VOLTAGE-CONTROLLED VOLTAGE SOURCES................................................................. 4-3 4.2 VOLTAGE-CONTROLLED CURRENT SOURCES ................................................................. 4-5 4.3 CURRENT-CONTROLLED VOLTAGE SOURCES ................................................................. 4-7 4.4 CURRENT-CONTROLLED CURRENT SOURCES ................................................................. 4-9 4.5 MULTIPLYING VOLTAGE-CONTROLLED VOLTAGE SOURCES..........................................4-11 4.6MULTIPLYINGVOLTAGE-CONTROLLEDCURRENTSOURCES.............................................................4-13 4.7 STATIC TRANSFER FUNCTIONS .....................................................................................4-15 4.7.1 Linear Static Transfer Function ...........................................................................4-15 4.7.2 Piece-Wise Linear Static Transfer Function .........................................................4-16 4.7.3 File Static Transfer Function ...............................................................................4-17 4.7.4 Threshold Static Transfer Function......................................................................4-18 4.7.5 Hysteresis Static Transfer Function......................................................................4-19 4.8 DYNAMIC TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FOR VOLTAGE OR CURRENT-CONTROLLED SOURCES..4-20 4.8.1 Unit-step Dynamic Response................................................................................4-21 4.8.2 S-plane Dynamic Transfer Function.....................................................................4-24 4.8.3 Z-plane Dynamic Transfer Function.....................................................................4-26 CHAPTER 5. S-PARAMETER ELEMENTS..................................................................... 5-1 5.1 INTRODUCTION TO S-PARAMETER ELEMENTS ................................................................ 5-2 5.2 1-PORT ELEMENTS DEFINED BY S-PARAMETERS ............................................................ 5-4 5.3 2-PORT ELEMENTS DEFINED BY S-PARAMETERS ............................................................ 5-5 5.4 3-PORT ELEMENTS DEFINED BY S-PARAMETERS ............................................................ 5-6 5.5 4-PORT ELEMENTS DEFINED BY S-PARAMETERS ............................................................ 5-7 5.6 S-PARAMETER DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................... 5-8 5.6.1 Piece-Wise Linear S-Parameter Description ......................................................... 5-8 5.6.2 File S-Parameter Description ..............................................................................5-10 CHAPTER 6. ADAPTORS.................................................................................................. 6-1 6.1 GENERAL FEATURES ..................................................................................................... 6-2 6.2 SERIES ADAPTORS ........................................................................................................ 6-3 6.3 BIMODAL ADAPTORS .................................................................................................... 6-5
  • 8. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Table of Contents DWS viii 6.4 MULTIMODAL ADAPTORS ..............................................................................................6-7 CHAPTER 7. SUBCIRCUITS AND CHAINS.....................................................................7-1 7.1 GENERAL FEATURES......................................................................................................7-2 7.2 SUBCIRCUITS.................................................................................................................7-3 7.2.1 .SUBCKT Statement ..............................................................................................7-3 7.2.2 .ENDS Statement...................................................................................................7-4 7.2.3 Subcircuit Calls.....................................................................................................7-4 7.3 CHAINS OF CELLS ..........................................................................................................7-5 7.3.1 .CELL Statement....................................................................................................7-5 7.3.2 .ENDC Statement ..................................................................................................7-6 7.3.3 Cell Calls..............................................................................................................7-6 CHAPTER 8. CONTROL STATEMENTS..........................................................................8-8 8.1 .OPTIONS STATEMENT ................................................................................................8-9 8.2 .TRAN STATEMENT.....................................................................................................8-10
  • 9. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino DWS General Features Chapter 1 1-1 Chapter 1 G e n e r a l F e a t u r e s 1. 1.1 Introduction 1.2 General use considerations 1.2.1 Time step 1.2.2 Elements 1.2.3 Two-port element conversion 1.2.4 Reference impedance 1.2.5 Delay discretization 1.2.6 DWS operation 1.2.7 Memory requirements 1.3 Circuit description 1.4 Input format 1.5 Output file 1.6 Report file 1.7 Starting DWS
  • 10. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino DWS General Features Chapter 1 1-2 1.1 Introduction DWS (Digital Wave Simulator) is a revolutionary electrical circuit simulator implemented with the aim of dealing with the needs of advanced electronic design in a more effective way than traditional tools. Using advanced concepts and unique powerful DSP (Digital Signal Processing) wave algorithms instead of classical Nodal Analysis (NA), DWS can perform simulations not feasible using NA tools. While traditional simulators are based on EQUATION SOLVERS, DWS is based on WAVE PROCESSORS. As known, NA-based simulation engines suffer of poor modeling capability of signal propagation effects because Nodal Analysis assumes no signal propagation within the electrical network under analysis. This last assumption is no more valid for dealing with modern high-speed circuitry where signal transition times are of the same order of magnitude or even lower than signal propagation delays. DWS was created by engineers for modeling and simulation of high-speed circuits and systems: DWS: early applications. The use of wave variables and scattering blocks (circuital elements and nodes) instead of classical voltages and currents of NA, leads to an extremely accurate and fast digital model of the electrical network under analysis :Application brochure (1989). Very accurate and effective models of both active and passive electronic devices can be directly obtained by means of time-domain experimental characterizations with no need of knowledge of the internal structure of them (BTM: Behavioral Time Modeling technique). Multiport time-domain S-parameter blocks can be easily built up starting from actual TDR (Time Domain Reflectometer) measurements using efficient PWL (PieceWise Linear) description of behaviors. Due to STABILITY of DWS wave algorithms, there is no need of strict CAUSALITY and PASSIVITY of S-parameter behaviors. In this way, very accurate and stable models of lossy interconnections (2-port, 4-port) can be easily built up: High-performance modeling & simulation. PWL behaviors can be used to describe non-linear resistors, allowing the user to simulate non-linear circuits that are not affordable with conventional NA simulators. I/O macromodels of digital integrated circuits, as the IBIS standard models, can be easily supported: SI/PI application course. Non-linear circuits including CHAOTIC circuits and systems can be easily simulated by DWS
  • 11. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino DWS General Features Chapter 1 1-3 without iterations and related convergence problems. Simulation throughput is in the order of Megasamples/sec compared to Kilosamples/sec of NA simulators. Very fast and accurate Transmission Line models open the way to very effective Transmission Line Modeling (TLM) of actual devices including 2-D lossy signal propagation effects. 2-D arrays of lossy Transmission Lines described by PWL Scattering Parameters can be used to build up accurate and fast models of power distribution planes: Modeling of power distribution planes. Working at fixed time step, DWS is fully Nyquist criterion compliant, while NA simulators are not. Wideband simulations are quickly feasible by using very small time steps and FFT post-processing leads to accurate results in frequency domain due to oversampling. The user can monitor a complete set of variables at each node of the circuit including Voltage, Current, Power, Incident and Reflected Waves etc. without any addition of extra elements as required by NA simulators. DWS algorithms are so fast and powerful that very complex networks with hundred thousand elements can be dealt with in seconds or minutes even for hundred thousand out samples. For this reason they have been utilized by major electronic system manufacturers for fast and accurate POST-LAYOUT simulations of complex Multiboard systems including 2-D models of Power Distribution network and accurate 4-port IBIS models of active devices I/Os: PRESTO. For the above reasons, DWS can be considered something more than simply a simulator: it is also a powerful modeling and simulation environment with a 4- decade long application history to state-of-the-art circuits and systems. DWS utilizes a SPICE-like syntax for network description. Powerful primitives permit a very efficient description of network elements and stimulus signals. PieceWise Linear (PWL) fittings and stored samples coming from previous simulations or measurements can be used as behavioral descriptions. In the same way the outputs coming from other analog simulators can be utilized to get DWS-compatible behavioral models. DWS and its companion graphical post-processor DWV (Digital Wave Viewer) belongs to the SWAN modeling and simulation environment. An online version of DWS with a schematic capture is available both as Web and mobile applications: Spicy SWAN.
  • 12. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino DWS General Features Chapter 1 1-4 1.2 General Use Considerations Even if DWS use is very similar to SPICE, its internal operation is completely different from the conventional analog simulators using Newton-Raphson iterative loops and NA sparse-matrix techniques. DWS utilizes a brand-new technique that converts the electrical network into a numerical equivalent operating like a true DSP (Digital Signal Processor) [1]. This approach gives the user several advantages including very high simulation speed, robustness (iterative procedures and convergence problems are virtually avoided), and the capability of simulating high complexity networks. DWS's performance advantages are more and more evident as this complexity increases and will further grow with the increase of computer's power. To operate DWS correctly, a few issues have to be taken into account. These issues will be briefly dealt with in the following. 1.2.1 Time Step Being a DSP, DWS operation requires a fixed time step. This time step is defined by the user in the .TRAN statement (see also Chapter 8), and its choice is very important because it greatly affects both accuracy and simulation speed. In any case, the Nyquist criterion has to be taken into account, so that the simulation time step is strictly correlated with the bandwidth of the simulated system and of its stimuli. Another consideration affecting the time-step choice is related to the delays of elements belonging to the simulated network. If no DELAYMETH option is specified, all the delays are rounded to an integer multiple of time step, so that no delay error occurs if each specified delay is an integer multiple of the chosen step. When this situation is not verified, as in the case of small delay differences between elements, due for instance to different mode propagation velocities in coupled lines, it is suggested to use the DELAYMETH=INTERPOLATION .option that operates some kind of interpolation in the delay evaluation, so that the simulation error is reduced even if a very small time step isn't used. Simulation error increases roughly with the square of the time step [2]. When in doubt about the choice, it is suggested to run a reference simulation with a small time step (e.g. 1/10 of the selected one) in order to compare the DWS's responses with this reference and to have an evaluation of the simulation error.
  • 13. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino DWS General Features Chapter 1 1-5 1.2.2 Elements . DWS's simulation engine maps each element and each node belonging to the source netlist into a numerical equivalent which exchanges signals with the rest of the network through its ports.. A port of an element is an internal DWS structure basically carrying the following variables.: A: port's incident voltage wave B: port's reflected voltage wave Z0: port's reference impedance where the voltage is normally referenced to ground (node 0). (0) NA B V I Z0 A B wave representation port N electrical representation Z0 Generic port N electrical network digital network wave At each element's port the following wave equations. apply: V = A + B stating that the port voltage is the sum of the port's incident and reflected voltage waves. I = (A - B) / Z0 stating that the current entering the port is the difference between the incident and reflected voltage waves divided by the port's reference impedance Z0. The reference impedance of each port is determined by DWS during a setup phase before the beginning of the real simulation run when the signals at each port are calculated. If DWS cannot determine all the port reference impedances,
  • 14. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino DWS General Features Chapter 1 1-6 proper warning message will be issued so that the user will be able to enter some more information (like the element's reference impedance) or to introduce in the netlist some decoupling elements like unit delays.. DWS can deal with elements having more than two ports. Element ports cannot be left open. An external resistor of practically infinite resistance (e.g. 1E9) can be connected between the open port and ground. In order to maintain SPICE compatibility, an element's port is normally identified in the source netlist by a node identifier (integer number). The reference node 0 (ground) of the port is specified only if it is necessary to have SPICE compatibility or to avoid misunderstanding. Examples: R1PORT 1 0 1K specifies a 1k one-port resistor. The port identifier is 1 corresponding to node 1. Here the ground node 0 is specified to have SPICE syntax compatibility. R2PORT 1 2 10K specifies a 10k two-port resistor. The port identifiers are 1 and 2 corresponding to node 1 and node 2 respectively. Here the ground node 0 is NOT specified to have SPICE syntax compatibility. AS3PORT 1 2 3 specifies a three-port element (series adaptor). The port identifiers are 1, 2 and 3 corresponding to node 1, node 2 and node 3 respectively. Here the ground node 0 is NOT specified because SPICE compatibility is not required (SPICE doesn't allow the use of this kind of adaptors). 1 PORT1 R1PORT 1 PORT1 R2PORT PORT2 2 1 PORT1 PORT2 2 3 PORT3
  • 15. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino DWS General Features Chapter 1 1-7 The two-port unbalanced transmission-line elements accept both SPICE-like syntax where the node 0 is specified and the short syntax where it is not specified. So: T2PORT 1 2 Z0=50 TD=1NS (short DWS syntax) or T2PORT 1 0 2 0 Z0=50 TD=1NS (Spice-like syntax) are the two ways allowed to describe the same transmission-line. 1 PORT1 PORT2 2 T2PORT 1.2.3 Two-Port Element Conversion . Before starting the simulation run, DWS converts some types of two-port elements of the flattened netlist into one-port elements connected to the third port of a series adaptor. This automatic conversion applies in particular for the following two-port elements: - Resistors (including nonlinear and controlled resistors) - Capacitors - Voltage sources (including controlled sources) - Current sources (including controlled sources) - Diodes Moreover, DWS converts the balanced transmission lines of the flattened netlist (four-port elements) into two-port transmission lines connected to the third port of two series adaptors. A similar conversion is applied to balanced ideal transformers. For example, the two-port resistor of the source netlist:
  • 16. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino DWS General Features Chapter 1 1-8 R2PORT 1 2 10K will be converted in the two following elements: AS.R2PORT 1 2 3 R2PORT 3 0 10K 1 2 3 R2PORT 1 R2PORT 2 In particular for two-port capacitors this is equivalent to use by default the so called "stub model" [2] which in turn means to apply the trapezoidal method of integration. By default the two-port inductance is NOT converted in this way. Instead a so called "link-model" is used to deal with inductances [2]. In this way DWS by default processes a two-port inductance as a unit-delay transmission line with impedance Z0=L/TSTEP where TSTEP is the simulation time step. If the user prefers the stub model (trapezoidal integration method), he can define the two- port inductance in the source netlist file as a series adaptor with a one-port inductance connected to its third port. For example, if the user specifies the following statement: L2PORT 1 2 1NH DWS deals with the inductance as a unit-delay transmission line of impedance Z0=1E-9/TSTEP; if he specifies instead the following statements: ASL 1 2 3 L1PORT 3 0 1NH
  • 17. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino DWS General Features Chapter 1 1-9 DWS deals with the inductance using the trapezoidal method equivalent to a shorted stub of Z0=2E-9/TSTEP and TD=TSTEP/2 connected between nodes 1 and 2. 1 L2PORT 2 1 2 "link" model 1 2 3 "stub" model Z0=2L/TSTEP TD=TSTEP/2 Z0=L/TSTEP TD=TSTEP default trapezoidal For the balanced transmission line, the automatic conversion is carried out for both its balanced ports, as shown below: TBAL 1 2 3 4 Z0=50 TD=1NS 1 2 3 4 is automatically converted in: AS.TBAL 1 2 10 TBAL 10 0 20 0 Z0=50 TD=1NS AS.TBAL 3 4 20 1 2 3 4 10 20 Ports 10 and 20 assume the meaning of balanced ports corresponding to the couples of nodes 1,2 and 3,4 respectively.
  • 18. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino DWS General Features Chapter 1 1-10 During the automatic two-port conversion, DWS also carries out a search for parallel connections involving elements belonging to the types previously mentioned. If two or more elements of these types are found to be connected in parallel, this configuration will be automatically converted by means of a single series adaptor, so that all the converted 1-port elements will be connected in parallel at the third port of it. Example: R 1 2 100 R N 0 100 C 1 2 1NF AS.P.R 1 2 N D 1 2 DMOD C N 0 1NF D N 0 DMOD 1 2 1 2 R C D N R C D AS.P.R The identifier of the series adaptor will be AS.P.elname (P means parallel) where elname is the name of the element connected in the parallel block that first has been descripted in the netlist. 1.2.4 Reference Impedance . As previously mentioned each element's port needs to have its reference impedance defined by DWS before starting the simulation run. Some elements like the piecewise-linear resistor or the diode require that the value of the reference impedance are defined by the rest of the network connected to them. In some cases, DWS is unable to determine Z0 due to a particular topology of the network. This can happen, for instance, when two or more non-linear elements are directly connected together. In this case DWS stops before starting the simulation and issues a message identifying the problem and the location of the
  • 19. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino DWS General Features Chapter 1 1-11 involved elements. At this point the user can define Z0 directly in the nonlinear element's statement or add unit-delay transmission lines to cut the direct connection causing the problem. In both cases an element is added to the original network and its additional effect vanishes decreasing the time step. In general this additional effect is lower if the impedance is defined within the element's statement. 1.2.5 Delay Discretization Several DWS elements include an intrinsic delay whose value can be specified by means of parameter TD. To perform the simulation, the input value will be discretized on the basis of the selected simulation time step (TSTEP). No delay error due to discretization will occur if all specified parameters TD are integer multiple of simulation TSTEP. Two delay discretization strategies are allowed depending on the DELAYMETH option set by the user on the DWS input file: - ROUNDING: this is also the default method if no DELAYMETH is specified. If TD >_ 0.5 TSTEP the actual simulation delay DTD (Discretized Time Delay) will be the nearest integer multiple of the simulation timestep TSTEP, so that a maximum error of 0.5 TSTEP will be caused by the delay discretization. - INTERPOLATION: if TD >_ 0.5 TSTEP the output of the actual delay block will be obtained as linear interpolation between the outputs generated by the two delays multiple of the time step within which the given TD is comprised. This second kind of approximation leads generally to an error lower than pure rounding error. In case the input parameter TD is set to a value < TSTEP including 0, the actual discretized value for simulation will be set to TSTEP for both strategies.
  • 20. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino DWS General Features Chapter 1 1-12 Y N Input TD, TSTEP TD < 0.5 TSTEP DELAYMETH DTD = n TSTEP so that | TD - DTD | < 0.5 TSTEP * rounding DTD = TSTEP linear interpolation between the outputs On and On corresponding to the nearest integer multiples of time step +1 interpolation *
  • 21. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino DWS General Features Chapter 1 1-13 1.2.6 DWS Operation Starting from the circuit description contained in the input file, DWS creates sequentially three temporary files each generated from the previous one: filename.t0: compressed netlist generated from the source netlist where each statement is contained within a single line of text. The source lines separated by the continuation character "+" at the beginning of the line are joined together. filename.t1: netlist after the subcircuit and chain expansion (flattened netlist). filename.t2: netlist after the conversion of two-port elements into one-port elements connected to a series adaptor. DWS simulates the circuit as described in this temporary file. The report file is related to the information carried by this netlist. Syntax checks are performed at source netlist level. If a syntax violation is detected, DWS stops and an error message containing the identifier of the incorrect line is issued at the standard output, like: Fatal Error : error message On the basis of the network description contained in the flattened and converted netlist (filename.t2), DWS builds up a node table where each node is classified according to the number of connected element's ports. If nodes connected to only one port (excluding control nodes) are detected, DWS stops, and the following message will be issued at the standard output: Fatal Error : floating node N in element elname where N is the node with only one port and elname is the name of the element connected to N. If floating control nodes of controlled elements are detected, DWS stops, and the following message will be issued at the standard output: Fatal Error : floating control node N Upon the completion of node table and memory allocation procedure, DWS starts a simulation scheduler which assigns the reference impedance to each
  • 22. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino DWS General Features Chapter 1 1-14 element port. If some port impedance cannot be assigned due to a particular topology of the network, the problem is located and the following error message is issued at the standard output: Fatal Error : network topology not allowed due to element elname At this point, the user can add decoupling elements in the source netlist as previously described (see section 1.2.4). In this way the user has a complete information about the actual network he is going to simulate. Upon completion of the scheduling process a message is issued at the standard output and the true simulation run can begin. After a digital network setup phase during which the calculation parameters of elements and nodes are set, as well as the user's initial conditions (if so specified by the UIC parameter in the .TRAN statement), the simulation loop starts. Due to the outstanding robustness of DWS's algorithms, a simulation allowed to start will reach its end without incurring in troubles like convergence or numerical problems, that typically affect other products. These considerations apply as well in the most complex simulations involving a very large number of elements, that other analog simulators based on conventional algorithms can't afford. At the begin of the simulation run a CIRCUIT SIMULATION STARTED message is issued at the standard output. A message will be also issued during the simulation loop upon completion of one tenth of the simulation time window (TSTOP/10). The CPU time required by DWS to complete each tenth of the time window is strictly constant, so that the user can easily evaluate the amount of time that will be required to complete the run. At each loop, corresponding to a TSTEP increment of time, the digital network status is updated. The outputs regarding the signals specified by the user in the .TRAN statement are stored starting from TSTART and ending with TSTOP which also stops the simulation loop. At this point DWS outputs regarding the user selected waveforms are stored in the file identified as filename.g. If the user has specified an output time step (by means of the .TRAN parameter LIMPTS) not coincident with TSTEP, the filename.g will store waveform samples obtained performing a linear interpolation on the calculated samples. Upon simulation run completion, the CPU time information including Specific Elapsed Time (SET, see also 1.6) will be printed out on the standard output.
  • 23. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino DWS General Features Chapter 1 1-15 1.2.7 Memory Requirements The maximum allowed network complexity (see also 1.6) that DWS can process in a single run is determined by the amount of RAM space available. Because each element and node type has different memory allocation requirement, the maximum allowed net complexity also depends on the particular element mix and on net topology. For a typical mix, each thousand of elements requires about 1Mbyte of RAM space, so that a 8 Gbyte RAM personal computer can roughly process 8 Million element nets (considering the memory used by the system). [1] Piero Belforte, Giancarlo Guaschino: “Electrical Simulation using digital wave networks”, IASTED International Symposium, Paris June 1985. [2] P.B.Johns,M.O'Brien:"Use of the transmission-line modeling (TLM) method to solve nonlinear lumped networks", Radio & Electronic Eng., 1980, Vol.50, No.1/2, pp.59-70.
  • 24. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino DWS General Features Chapter 1 1-16 1.3 Circuit Description DWS circuit description philosophy is derived from the standard simulator SPICE. SPICE statement compatibility has been held as far as possible. In the situations not dealt with by SPICE, DWS syntax is conceived as a superset of SPICE syntax. The circuit to be analyzed is described to DWS by a set of element statements, which define the circuit topology and element values, and a set of control statements, which define the conditions of the simulation and the simulation results the user wishes saved. Comments are statements which begin with an asterisk "*" in column 1. They are for user documentation purposes only and are ignored during simulation. Simulation control statements begin with a dot "." in column 1. The last statement must be a .END statement. The order of the remaining statements is arbitrary. Each element in the circuit is specified by an element statement that contains the element name, the circuit nodes (port identifiers, see also 1.2.2) to which the element is connected, and the values of the parameters that determine the electrical characteristics of the element. The first letter of the element name specifies the element type. The format for the DWS element types is given in what follows. The strings XXXXXXX and YYYYYYY denote arbitrary alphanumeric strings. For example, a resistor name must begin with the letter R and can contain one or more characters. Hence, R, R1, RS, ROUT, and R1TERM are valid resistor names. Data fields that are enclosed in less than and greater than signs "< >" are optional. All indicated punctuation (parentheses, equal signs, etc.) must be specified. Nodes names (port identifiers) must be positive integer numbers. The datum (ground) node must be named "0". Every node must have at least two ports except for control nodes. As mentioned in 1.2.4, the situations in which the program cannot find the proper value for the reference impedance of an element port are pinpointed and warning message containing involved element is issued. In this case the user can insert an additional element, usually a unit-delay transmission line, or specify the impedance within the element's statement. Hierarchical circuit descriptions are possible through the use of subcircuits (see also .SUBCKT statement) that operate exactly in the same way of SPICE. An additional automatic description capability is offered by DWS by means of chains (see also .CHAIN statement) allowing the user to build up a cascade connection of whatever number of basic circuit cells defined in the same input text.
  • 25. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino DWS General Features Chapter 1 1-17 1.4 Input Format The input format for DWS is of the free format type. Fields in a statement are separated by one or more blanks, a comma, an equal "=" sign, or a left or right parenthesis; extra spaces are ignored. A statement may be continued by entering a + (plus) in column 1 of the following line; DWS continues reading beginning with column 2. A name field must begin with a letter (A through Z) and cannot contain any delimiters. A number field may be an integer field (12, -44), a floating point field (3.14159), either an integer or floating point number followed by an integer exponent (1E- 14, 2.65E3), or either an integer or a floating point number followed by one of the following scale factors: T=1E12 G=1E9 MEG=1E6 K=1E3 M=1E-3 U=1E-6 N=1E-9 P=1E-12 F=1E-15 Letters immediately following a number that are not scale factors are ignored, and letters immediately following a scale factor are ignored. Hence, 10, 10V, 10VOLTS, and 10HZ all represent the same number, and M, MA, MSEC, and MMHOS all represent the same scale factor. Note that 1000, 1000.0, 1000HZ, 1E3, 1.0E3, 1KHZ, and 1K all represent the same number.
  • 26. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino DWS General Features Chapter 1 1-18 1.5 Output File The DWS outputs are stored in the file filename.g which has the following structure: FILE_NAME NUMBER_OF_WAVEFORMS NUMBER_OF_SAMPLES_PER_WAVEFORM SAMPLING_TIMESTEP <START_TIME> WAVEFORM_NAME #1 LIST_OF_SAMPLES . . . WAVEFORM_NAME #N LIST_OF_SAMPLES <COMMENTS> where: FILE_NAME is the name of the file containing the simulated waveform(s) (filename.g). NUMBER_OF_WAVEFORMS is the number of waveforms included in the file specified by FILE_NAME. NUMBER_OF_WAVEFORMS is a nonzero unsigned integer. NUMBER_OF_SAMPLES is the number of samples of each waveform included in the file specified by FILE_NAME. NUMBER_OF_SAMPLES is the same for each waveform belonging to this file. SAMPLING_TIMESTEP is the time between two contiguous samples of each stored waveform expressed in seconds. The samples are stored at fixed time step. SAMPLING_TIMESTEP applies to all the waveforms included in the file and depends on the TSTEP and LIMPTS values specified within the .TRAN
  • 27. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino DWS General Features Chapter 1 1-19 statement of DWS. If LIMPTS is greater than (TSTOP-TSTART)/TSTEP, the number of stored samples per waveform is limited to (TSTOP-TSTART)/TSTEP and SAMPLING_TIMESTEP is equal to TSTEP. If LIMPTS is smaller than (TSTOP-TSTART)/TSTEP, the stored output samples are obtained by linear interpolation of the simulated values and SAMPLING_TIMESTEP is equal to (TSTOP-TSTART)/LIMPTS. If LIMPTS is omitted, SAMPLING_TIMESTEP is equal to TSTEP. Usually the time is assumed as independent variable and all the waveforms are given versus time. When necessary, sampling time step can be used with the meaning of sample identifier. In this last case one of the waveforms can be assumed as independent variable. START_TIME is the time expressed in seconds at which DWS begins to save the results of the simulation and applies to all the waveforms included in the same file. START_TIME corresponds to TSTART specified within the .TRAN statement. If START_TIME is not specified, it is assumed to be 0. WAVEFORM_NAME is the identifier of the waveform specifying the variable type (voltage, current, etc.) and the node or port (element and node) identifier to which the waveform is related. The following WAVEFORM_NAME types are available: V(N) : voltage at node (port) N referenced to ground (node 0) V(N1,N2) : voltage at node (port) N1 referenced to node (port) N2 I(ELEM,N) : input current at port N of element ELEM P(ELEM,N) : instantaneous input power at port N of element ELEM A(ELEM,N) : incident voltage wave at port N of element ELEM B(ELEM,N) : reflected voltage wave at port N of element ELEM Y(ELEM,N) : reference admittance of port N of element ELEM Z(ELEM,N) : reference impedance of port N of element ELEM (Z=1/Y) Q(ELEM,N) : incident instantaneous power at port N of element ELEM R(ELEM,N) : reflected instantaneous power at port N of element ELEM G(ELEM,N) : B/A wave ratio at port N of element ELEM where the node/element identifiers are those specified in .TRAN statement.
  • 28. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino DWS General Features Chapter 1 1-20 LIST_OF_SAMPLE is the list of samples of the waveform specified by WAVEFORM_NAME. Each sample is given in exponential notation. The user can add COMMENT in the DWS's output file after the last list of samples. Each comment line must have an asterisk "*" as first character of the line. The DWS's output file format can be also used to describe directly the behavior of independent sources, the dynamic transfer function of controlled elements and scattering-parameter elements.
  • 29. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino DWS General Features Chapter 1 1-21 1.6 Report File The report file obtained with the -r option of DWS command is a summary of the most important features of the simulation including: - SIMULATION PARAMETERS specified by the user including temperature, simulation time step and time window. - NETWORK ELEMENT SUMMARY which classifies the expanded network derived from the DWS input netlist. For each element type the number of elements contained in the flattened input netlist (filename.t2) is reported giving also the total number of elements (En.) and the total number of nodes (Nn.). The sum of En and Nn is assumed to be an index of the complexity of the network. - OUTPUT VARIABLE SUMMARY. that lists all output waveforms (node voltages, branch currents, waves at the element's ports, instantaneous powers, etc.) specified in the .TRAN statement and saved in the graphic output file (filename.g). The number of stored samples per waveform is also specified. - SIMULATION STATISTICS SUMMARY. giving some figures related to the complexity. of the simulation to be carried out. This complexity is evaluated by means of a Complexity Factor (Cf.) defined as the product of Network Complexity and the number of Calculated Time-Points. - JOB STATISTICS SUMMARY giving the actual CPU time required for the simulation run and shared into user and system components. DWS's execution time is roughly proportional to the Complexity Factor multiplied by the Specific Elapsed Time (SET.). The SET is defined as the ratio between the actual Elapsed Time and Cf. SET only depends on the mix of elements contained in the network and on the computer's power so that simulation time growth is strictly linear versus the complexity of the network.
  • 30. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino DWS General Features Chapter 1 1-22 1.7 Starting DWS . Before starting, make sure to have a user-account set up to run DWS. To start DWS, enter the command: DWS [-rs] filename where the options and the arguments have the following meaning: filename: name of the file containing the source netlist (max allowed length: 100 characters). -r (report):. information related to running simulation, including circuit statistics (number and type of elements/nodes of the circuit) and execution times, is saved in a report file filename.r -s (silent)..: no output message about the running simulation is issued (useful in batch mode).
  • 31. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-1 Chapter 2 P a s s i v e E l e m e n t s . 2. 2 2.1 Linear Resistors 2.2 Piece-Wise Linear Resistors 2.3 Time-Controlled Linear Resistors 2.3.1 DC Resistor Function 2.3.2 Pulse Resistor Function 2.3.3 PulsePoly Resistor Function 2.3.4 PulseErfc Resistor Function 2.3.5 Erfc Resistor Function 2.3.6 Delta Resistor Function 2.3.7 Sinusoidal Resistor Function 2.3.8 Piece-Wise Linear Resistor Function 2.3.9 PulsePwl Resistor Function 2.3.10 File Resistor Function 2.3.11 PulseFile Resistor Function 2.4 Voltage-Controlled Resistors
  • 32. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-2 2.5 Current-Controlled Resistors 2.6 Static Transfer Function for Voltage or Current Controlled Resistors 2.6.1 Linear Static Transfer Function 2.6.2 Piece-Wise Linear Static Transfer Function 2.6.3 File Static Transfer Function 2.6.4 Threshold Static Transfer Function 2.6.5 Hysteresis Static Transfer Function 2.7 Dynamic Transfer Function for Voltage or Current Controlled Resistors 2.7.1 Unit-step Dynamic Response 2.7.2 S-plane Dynamic Transfer Function 2.7.3 Z-plane Dynamic Transfer Function 2.8 Linear Capacitors 2.9 Linear Inductors 2.10 Unbalanced Transmission Lines 2.11 Balanced Transmission Lines 2.12 Unit-Delay Transmission Lines 2.13 Ideal Transformers 2.14 Junction Diodes
  • 33. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-3 2.1 Linear Resistors . N1 N2 General form: RXXXXXXX N1 N2 value Examples: R1 1 0 1K RS 15 22 50 N1 and N2 are the two element nodes. Value is the resistance (in ohms) and may be positive (1/GMAX  value  1/GMIN) or negative (-1/GMIN  value  - 1/GMAX). If the parameter value is set to zero, the default value 1/GMAX will be assumed (see the .OPTIONS statement).
  • 34. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-4 2.2 Piece-Wise Linear Resistors .. N -N + General form: PXXXXXXX N+ N- V1 I1 V2 I2 <V3 I3 ... <V200 I200>> PXXXXXXX N+ N- V1 I1 V2 I2 <V3 I3 ... <V200 I200>> Z0=value PXXXXXXX N+ N- V1 I1 V2 I2 <V3 I3 ... <V200 I200>> C=value PXXXXXXX N+ N- V1 I1 V2 I2 <V3 I3 ... <V200 I200>> L=value Examples: P1 1 0 -1 -.01 0 0 1 .1 Z0=50 PRDR 10 20 0 0 .6 6UA .8 .5MA .85 2.5MA .9 10MA N+ and N- are the positive and negative element nodes, respectively. The nonlinear resistance. is described by pairs of values Vi,Ii (Fig.2.2.1). The number of pairs (n) must be 2 n 200. For V < V1 the resistance keeps the value related to V1 < V < V2. For V > Vn the resistance keeps the value related to Vn-1 < V < Vn. The pairs must be written in order of increasing voltage values (Vi  Vi+1). V I 1 2 3 4 (V 1 , I 1 ) (V 2 , I 2 ) (V 3 , I 3 ) (V 4 , I 4 ) N-N+I V Fig.2.2.1 Voltage-current relationship for a 2-port PWL resistor. If the optional parameters Z0, C or L are not given, the reference impedance at the N+ and N- ports will automatically be set by the circuit elements connected to the Piece-Wise Linear Resistor. If, due to network topology, the port reference impedance cannot be defined, one of the three optional parameters must be
  • 35. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-5 specified. In this way an additional transmission line with a delay of TSTEP/2, connected at the intrinsic Piece-Wise Linear Resistor, decouples it from the other elements of the network. intrinsic PWL resistor TD=TSTEP/2 Z0 N+ N- N+ N- C N+ N- L/2 L/2 Fig.2.2.2: Electrical equivalents of two-port PWL resistor when additional parameters Z0, C, L are specified for decoupling.. The characteristic impedance of this line may be expressed in one of three forms: directly as impedance Z0 (ohms), as capacitance C (Farads), so Z0 is set to TSTEP/(2*C), or as inductance L (Henries), so Z0 is set to 2*L/TSTEP. If the Piece-Wise Linear Resistor is described as two-port element (i.e. neither N+ nor N- is ground node), the additional line is a true or capacitive or inductive balanced transmission line (Fig.2.2.2); if the Piece-Wise Linear Resistor is described as one-port element (i.e. either N+ or N- is ground node), the additional line is a true or capacitive or inductive unbalanced transmission line (Fig.2.2.3). An alternative method is to use a Unit-Delay Transmission Line for decoupling. purposes, but in this case an additional line with a delay of TSTEP is introduced in the network, leading to a transient effect greater than that due to the internal Z0 setting. N N N TD Z0 L TSTEP 2 = intrinsic PWL resistor C Fig.2.2.3: Electrical equivalents of one-port PWL resistor when additional parameters Z0, C, L are specified for decoupling.
  • 36. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-6 2.3 Time-Controlled Linear Resistors . N1 N2 t General form: RXXXXXXX N1 N2 rsource RXXXXXXX N1 N2 rsource Z0=value RXXXXXXX N1 N2 rsource C=value RXXXXXXX N1 N2 rsource L=value N1 and N2 are the two element nodes. rsource is the time-controlled resistor function. Resistance value may be positive or negative, but not zero. If positive resistance value becomes < 1/GMAX, the default value 1/GMAX will be automatically set; if negative resistance value becomes > -1/GMAX, the default value -1/GMAX will be automatically set (see the .OPTIONS statement). Eleven control functions are available: DC, Pulse, PulsePoly, PulseErfc, Erfc, Delta, Sinusoidal, Piece-Wise Linear, PulsePwl, File and PulseFile. The Pulse, Piece-Wise Linear and Sinusoidal functions have the same syntax and meaning of corresponding functions used in SPICE for time-dependent sources. The PulsePoly, PulseErfc, PulsePwl, PulseFile functions are extensions of the Pulse function where the behavior of pulse edges can be expressed in several ways including polynomial, piece-wise linear and generic behaviors described in a DWS output file. If one of the three optional parameters Z0, C or L is specified, an additional transmission line with a delay of TSTEP/2, connected at the intrinsic Time- Controlled Linear Resistor, decouples it from the other elements of the network. In this way, if delay-free circuit elements are connected to the Time-Controlled Linear Resistor, the reference impedance at their ports doesn't have to be calculated at each simulation step, speeding up the run time.
  • 37. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-7 intrinsic TCL resistor TD=TSTEP/2 Z0 N1 N2 N1 N2 C N1 N2 L/2 L/2 Fig.2.3.1: Electrical equivalents of two-port TCL resistor when additional parameters Z0, C, L are specified for decoupling. The characteristic impedance of this line may be expressed in one of three forms: directly as impedance Z0 (ohms), as capacitance C (Farads), so Z0 is set to TSTEP/(2*C), or as inductance L (Henries), so Z0 is set to 2*L/TSTEP. If the Time-Controlled Linear Resistor is described as two-port element (i.e. neither N1 nor N2 is ground node), the additional line is a true or capacitive or inductive balanced transmission line (Fig.2.3.1); if the Time-Controlled Linear Resistor is described as one-port element (i.e. either N1 or N2 is ground node), the additional line is a true or capacitive or inductive unbalanced transmission line (Fig.2.3.2). An alternative method is to use a Unit-Delay Transmission Line for decoupling. purposes, but in this case an additional line with a delay of TSTEP is introduced in the network, leading to a transient effect greater than that due to the internal Z0 setting. N N N TD Z0 L TSTEP 2 = intrinsic TCL resistor C Fig.2.3.2: Electrical equivalents of one-port TCL resistor when additional parameters Z0, C, L are specified for decoupling. User note: Time-Controlled Linear Resistors can be utilized to implement time-dependent switches. Their use doesn't cause any numerical problem to DWS if Time- Controlled Linear Resistors are not connected to Delay-Free Loops (DFLs). This connection could cause problems in particular situations, especially if the
  • 38. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-8 dynamic range of resistance values is very large. In these cases (automatically identified by DWS) the user can decouple the Time-Controlled Linear Resistor from DFL defining the reference impedance in the element's statement or cut the DFL by means of additional Unit-Delay Transmission Lines inserted in the network.
  • 39. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-9 2.3.1 DC Resistor Function . Syntax: DC <(>RDC<)> RDC t Example: RIN 4 0 DC( 50 ) The resistor value is time-invariant. The value may optionally be enclosed by round brackets. The previous statement is completely equivalent to : RIN 4 0 50
  • 40. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-10 2.3.2 Pulse Resistor Function . Syntax: PULSE( R1 R2 <TD <TR <TF <PW <PER>>>>> ) R1 R2 0 TD TR PW PER TF t Example: RIN 4 0 PULSE( 1E6 1E-6 5NS 1NS 1NS 24NS 50NS ) parameters default values units R1 (initial value) ohms R2 (pulsed value) ohms TD (delay time) 0.0 seconds TR (rise time) TSTEP seconds TF (fall time) TSTEP seconds PW (pulse width) TSTOP seconds PER(period) TSTOP seconds A single pulse so specified is described by the following breakpoint table: time value 0 R1 TD R1 TD+TR R2 TD+TR+PW R2 TD+TR+PW+TF R1 TSTOP R1 Intermediate points are determined by linear interpolation.
  • 41. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-11 2.3.3 PulsePoly Resistor Function . Syntax: PULSE( R1 R2 <TD <TR <TF <PW <PER>>>>> ) POLY( C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 ) R1 R2 0 TD TR PW PER TF t Example: RIN 4 0 PULSE( 1E6 1E-6 5NS 1NS 1NS 24NS 50NS ) POLY( 0 .13 -.3.24 23.45 -36.62 21.17 -3.89 ) This function is an extension of the basic Pulse function, when rise and fall edge behaviors are not linear but can be fitted by a higher-degree polynomial. The meaning and the default values of PulsePoly parameters are like those of the corresponding parameters of Pulse, unless edge shape is described by a 6-degree polynomial in PulsePoly source. C0, C1, ... C6 are the coefficients of the polynomial. The polynomial is defined between 0 and 1 and, at the lower and upper limits of this range, must assume the values 0 and 1 respectively in order that the actual edge shape will reflect the polynomial shape. The polynomial definition window will be automatically scaled to the actual windows TR, R1, R2, and TF, R2, R1 (fig.2.3.3.1).  BASIC POLY DEFINITION WINDOW 0 1 0 1 RISE-EDGE WINDOW R1 R2 TR FALL-EDGE WINDOW R1 R2 TF t POLY(t) POLY(t)= 6 n=0 Cn tn =1 n=0 6 Cn Fig.2.3.3.1: Mapping of basic poly definition window into rise and fall windows.
  • 42. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-12 2.3.4 PulseErfc Resistor Function . Syntax: PULSE( R1 R2 <TD <TR <TF <PW <PER>>>>> ) ERFC R1 R2 0 TD TR PW PER TF t Example: RIN 4 0 PULSE(1E6 1E-6 5NS 1NS 1NS 24NS 50NS ) ERFC This function is an extension of the basic Pulse function when rise and fall edges can be fitted by a complementary error function (erfc) behavior. The meaning and the default values of PulseErfc parameters are like those of the corresponding parameters of Pulse, unless edge shape is that of erfc. The definition window of erfc will be automatically scaled to the rise and fall edge windows (fig.2.3.4.1). BASIC ERFC DEFINITION WINDOW 0 1 0 1 RISE-EDGE WINDOW R1 R2 TR FALL-EDGE WINDOW R1 R2 TF t erfc Fig.2.3.4.1: Mapping of basic erfc definition window into rise and fall windows.
  • 43. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-13 2.3.5 Erfc Resistor Function . Syntax: ERFC( R1 R2 TD TR ) R1 R2 0 TD TR t Example: RIN 4 0 ERFC(1E6 1E-6 5NS 1NS ) parameters units R1 (initial value) ohms R2 (final value) ohms TD (delay time) seconds TR (rise time) seconds The shape of the waveform is described by the following table: time value 0 to TD R1 TD+TR to TSTOP R2 from TD to TD+TR the edge shape is like the shape of erfc function.
  • 44. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-14 2.3.6 Delta Resistor Function . Syntax: DELTA( <R <TD>> ) R 0 TD t Example: RIN 4 0 DELTA( 1E6 5NS ) parameters default values units R (impulse value) 1 ohms TD (delay time) 0.0 seconds This function implements a delayed Dirac's pulse behavior in according to the following table. time value 0 to TD- 0 TD R TD+ to TSTOP 0
  • 45. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-15 2.3.7 Sinusoidal Resistor Function . Syntax: SIN( RO RA <FREQ <TD <THETA>>> ) 0 TD R0 RA 1/ FREQ THETA t Example: RIN 4 0 SIN( 1E3 1E3 100MEG 5NS 10MEG ) parameters default values units RO (offset) ohms RA (amplitude) ohms FREQ (frequency) 1/TSTOP Hz TD (delay) 0.0 seconds THETA (damping factor) 0.0 1/seconds This function implements an exponentially decaying sinusoidal behavior described by the following table: time value 0 to TD R0 TD to TSTOP RO + RA*exp(-(t-TD)*THETA)*sin(2*FREQ*(t-TD)) The syntax is derived from SPICE sinusoidal source.
  • 46. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-16 2.3.8 Piece-Wise Linear Resistor Function . Syntax: PWL( T1 R1 T2 R2 <T3 R3 <T4 R4 ... <T199 R199 <T200 R200>>>> ) 0 tT1 T2 T3 T4 T5 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 Example: RIN 4 0 PWL( 10NS 1E6 11NS 1E-6 15NS 1E-6 16NS 1E6 ) This function implements a piece-wise linear behavior containing up to 200 breakpoints. Each breakpoint is defined by a pair of values (Ti, Ri) that specifies the resistance Ri (in ohms) of the time-controlled resistor at time=Ti (in seconds). The number of pairs (n) must be 2 n 200. The value of the resistance at intermediate values of time is determined by using linear interpolation on the input values. For time < T1 the value of the resistance is R1, for time > Tn the value of the resistance is Rn. The pairs must be written in order of increasing time values (Ti  Ti+1), otherwise a specific error message is issued on the standard output.
  • 47. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-17 2.3.9 PulsePwl Resistor Function . Syntax: PULSE( R1 R2 <TD <TR <TF <PW <PER>>>>> ) PWL( T1 Y1 T2 Y2 <T3 Y3 <T4 Y4 ... <T199 Y199 <T200 Y200>>>> ) R1 R2 0 TD TR PW PER TF t tT1 T2 T3 T4 T5 Tn Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Yn Example: RIN 4 0 PULSE(1E6 1E-6 5NS 2NS 2NS 23NS 50NS ) PWL( 0 1E6 .3NS 1E3 .6NS 100 1NS 10 1.4NS 1E-2 2NS 1E-6 ) This function is an extension of the basic Pulse function when rise and fall edges can be fitted by a piece-wise linear behavior. The meaning and the default values of PulsePwl parameters are like those of the corresponding parameters of Pulse, unless edge shape is described by the pairs of values Ti, Yi in PulsePwl resistor. The pairs, written in order of increasing time values (Ti  Ti+1), determine edge shape, while the actual value of the resistance is defined by the parameters R1, R2, TR, TF. The PWL definition window will be automatically scaled to the actual rise and fall edge windows. The piece-wise linear swing Yn - Y1 (n: number of pairs) will become the pulse swing R2 - R1, the time interval Tn - T1 will become TR for the rise edge and TF for the fall edge as explained in section 2.3.4.
  • 48. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-18 2.3.10 File Resistor Function . Syntax: FILE( filename ) R1R0 0 t R2 R3 Rn T 2T 3T nT Example: RIN 4 0 FILE(ressamples ) This function implements a time-controlled resistor whose behavior is described by a DWS-format file identified by the parameter filename. In this file a sampling timestep (T) will be specified. If the simulation timestep (TSTEP in .TRAN statement) is not coincident with the file timestep, the resistance values will be determined using linear interpolation of the values contained in the file. After the last sample contained in the file, the resistance value is assumed to be equal to the value of the last sample. File name must begin with a letter. Strings beginning with 'DC' or 'dc' are invalid file names since these strings are interpreted as the DC parameter of an independent source.
  • 49. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-19 2.3.11 PulseFile Resistor Function . Syntax: PULSE( NC NC <TD <NC <NC <PW <PER>>>>> ) FILE(filename) 0 TD PW PER t t0 Y1 Y0 n*T Yn T 2T Y2 Example: RIN 4 0 PULSE( 0 0 5NS 0 0 23NS 50NS ) FILE(ressamples ) This function is an extension of the basic Pulse function when rise and fall edges can be described by a behavior contained in a DWS-format file identified by the parameter filename. File name must begin with a letter. Strings beginning with 'DC' or 'dc' are invalid file names. The meaning and the default values of the parameters TD, PW and PER are like those of the corresponding parameters of Pulse, whereas initial value, pulsed value, rise time, fall time and edge shape are determined by resistance samples versus time contained in the file. For this reason the initial, pulsed, rise time and fall time values specified in the PULSE syntax will be not considered. parameter value R1 Y0 (1st file sample) R2 Yn (last file sample) TR n*T TF n*T
  • 50. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-20 If the simulation timestep (TSTEP in .TRAN statement) is not coincident with the file timestep, the resistance values will be determined using linear interpolation of the values contained in the file.
  • 51. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-21 2.4 Voltage-Controlled Resistors . - NC+ NC- DELAY D.T.F. S.T.F. Dynamic Transfer Function Static Transfer Function Control Link Chain VCR N1 N2 General form RXXXXXXX N1 N2 NC+ NC- STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> <TD> RXXXXXXX N1 N2 NC+ NC- STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> <TD> Z0=value RXXXXXXX N1 N2 NC+ NC- STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> <TD> C=value RXXXXXXX N1 N2 NC+ NC- STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> <TD> L=value - NC+ NC- DELAY D.T.F.S.T.F. Dynamic Transfer Function Static Transfer Function Control Link Chain VCR N1 N2 General form RXXXXXXX N1 N2 NC+ NC- <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <TD> RXXXXXXX N1 N2 NC+ NC- <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <TD> Z0=value
  • 52. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-22 RXXXXXXX N1 N2 NC+ NC- <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <TD> C=value RXXXXXXX N1 N2 NC+ NC- <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <TD> L=value This form is an extension of the syntax used in SPICE for voltage-controlled sources. N1 and N2 are the two element nodes. NC+ and NC- are the positive and negative controlling nodes, respectively. The controlling signal is V(NC+) - V(NC-). Like the other voltage and current controlled elements, the Voltage-Controlled Resistors can have two types of control link chain with different positions of the transfer functions. The static transfer function must be specified, while the dynamic transfer function is optional. The optional parameter TD is a delay time expressed in seconds. The Delay operator is the first block of the control link chain and acts on the controlling signal. The minimum delay is corresponding to TSTEP (specified in the .TRAN statement) even if the input parameter TD is omitted or set to a value < TSTEP. This approximation can be considered when zero-delay control links are simulated. Regarding the delay discretization process, both ROUNDING and INTERPOLATION methods described in 1.2.5 are allowed depending on the DELAYMETH option set by the user on the DWS input file. Resistance value may be positive or negative, but not zero. If positive resistance value becomes < 1/GMAX, the default value 1/GMAX will be automatically set; if negative resistance value becomes > -1/GMAX, the default value -1/GMAX will be automatically set (see the .OPTIONS statement). If one of the three optional parameters Z0, C or L is specified, an additional transmission line with a delay of TSTEP/2, connected at the intrinsic Voltage- Controlled Resistor, decouples it from the other elements of the network. In this way, if delay-free circuit elements are connected to the Voltage-Controlled Resistor, the reference impedance at their ports doesn't have to be calculated at each simulation step, speeding up the run time.
  • 53. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-23 N1 N2 L/2 L/2 intrinsic VCR TD=TSTEP/2 Z0 N1 N2 NC+ NC- N1 N2 C NC+ NC- NC+ NC- Fig.2.4.1: Electrical equivalents of two-port VCR when additional parameters Z0, C, L are specified for decoupling. The characteristic impedance of this line may be expressed in one of three forms: directly as impedance Z0 (ohms), as capacitance C (Farads), so Z0 is set to TSTEP/(2*C), or as inductance L (Henries), so Z0 is set to 2*L/TSTEP. If the Voltage-Controlled Resistor is described as two-port element (i.e. neither N1 nor N2 is ground node), the additional line is a true or capacitive or inductive balanced transmission line (Fig.2.4.1); if the Voltage-Controlled Resistor is described as one-port element (i.e. either N1 or N2 is ground node), the additional line is a true or capacitive or inductive unbalanced transmission line (Fig.2.4.2). An alternative method is to use a Unit-Delay Transmission Line for decoupling. purposes, but in this case an additional line with a delay of TSTEP is introduced in the network, leading to a transient effect greater than that due to the internal Z0 setting. N N N TD Z0 L TSTEP 2 = intrinsic VCR C NC+ NC- NC+ NC- NC+ NC- Fig.2.4.2: Electrical equivalents of one-port VCR when additional parameters Z0, C, L are specified for decoupling. Use note: the Voltage-Controlled Resistors (VCR) can be utilized to implement controlled switches that in turn can model logic functionality. The use of VCR doesn't cause
  • 54. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-24 any numerical problem to DWS if VCRs are not connected to Delay-Free Loops (DFLs). This connection could cause some solution problems in particular situations especially if the dynamic range of resistance values is very large. In these cases (automatically identified by DWS) the user can decouple the VCR from DFL defining the reference impedance in the element's statement or cut the DFL by means of additional Unit-Delay Transmission Lines inserted in the network.
  • 55. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-25 2.5 Current-Controlled Resistors . DELAY D.T.F. S.T.F. Dynamic Transfer Function Static Transfer Function Control Link Chain CCR N1 N2 N I ELEM C General form: RXXXXXXX N1 N2 I(ELEM,NC) STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> <TD> RXXXXXXX N1 N2 I(ELEM,NC) STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> <TD> Z0=value RXXXXXXX N1 N2 I(ELEM,NC) STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> <TD> C=value RXXXXXXX N1 N2 I(ELEM,NC) STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> <TD> L=value DELAY D.T.F.S.T.F. Dynamic Transfer Function Static Transfer Function Control Link Chain CCR N1 N2 N I ELEM C General form: RXXXXXXX N1 N2 I(ELEM,NC) <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <TD>
  • 56. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-26 RXXXXXXX N1 N2 I(ELEM,NC) <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <TD> Z0=value RXXXXXXX N1 N2 I(ELEM,NC) <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <TD> C=value RXXXXXXX N1 N2 I(ELEM,NC) <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <TD> L=value This form is an extension of the syntax used in SPICE for current-controlled sources. N1 and N2 are the two element nodes. The controlling current I(ELEM,NC) is the current which enters the port of the element ELEM connected to the node NC. Like the other voltage and current elements, the Current- Controlled Resistors can have two types of control link chain with different positions of the transfer functions. The static transfer function must be specified, while the dynamic transfer function is optional. The optional parameter TD is a delay time expressed in seconds. The Delay operator is the first block of the control link chain and acts on the controlling signal. The minimum delay is corresponding to TSTEP (specified in the .TRAN statement) even if the input parameter TD is omitted or set to a value < TSTEP. This approximation can be considered when zero-delay control links are simulated. Regarding the delay discretization process, both ROUNDING and INTERPOLATION methods described in 1.2.5 are allowed depending on the DELAYMETH option set by the user on the DWS input file. Resistance value may be positive or negative, but not zero. If positive resistance value becomes < 1/GMAX, the default value 1/GMAX will be automatically set; if negative resistance value becomes > -1/GMAX, the default value -1/GMAX will be automatically set (see the .OPTIONS statement). If one of the three optional parameters Z0, C or L is specified, an additional transmission line with a delay of TSTEP/2, connected at the intrinsic Current- Controlled Resistor, decouples it from the other elements of the network. In this way, if delay-free circuit elements are connected to the Current-Controlled Resistor, the reference impedance at their ports doesn't have to be calculated at each simulation step, speeding up the run time.
  • 57. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-27 N1 N2 L/2 L/2 intrinsic TD=TSTEP/2 Z0 N1 N2 N1 N2 C I II CCR Fig.2.5.1: Electrical equivalents of two-port CCR when additional parameters Z0, C, L are specified for decoupling. The characteristic impedance of this line may be expressed in one of three forms: directly as impedance Z0 (ohms), as capacitance C (Farads), so Z0 is set to TSTEP/(2*C), or as inductance L (Henries), so Z0 is set to 2*L/TSTEP. If the Current-Controlled Resistor is described as two-port element (i.e. neither N1 nor N2 is ground node), the additional line is a true or capacitive or inductive balanced transmission line (Fig.2.5.1); if the Current-Controlled Resistor is described as one-port element (i.e. either N1 or N2 is ground node), the additional line is a true or capacitive or inductive unbalanced transmission line (Fig.2.5.2). An alternative method is to use a Unit-Delay Transmission Line for decoupling. purposes, but in this case an additional line with a delay of TSTEP is introduced in the network, leading to a transient effect greater than that due to the internal Z0 setting. N N N TD Z0 L TSTEP 2 = intrinsic C I I I CCR Fig.2.5.2: Electrical equivalents of one-port CCR when additional parameters Z0, C, L are specified for decoupling. Use note:
  • 58. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-28 the Current-Controlled Resistors (CCR) can be utilized to implement controlled switches that in turn can model logic functionality. The use of CCR doesn't cause any numerical problem to DWS if CCRs are not connected to Delay-Free Loops (DFLs). This connection could cause some solution problems in particular situations especially if the dynamic range of resistance values is very large. In these cases (automatically identified by DWS) the user can decouple the CCR from DFL defining the reference impedance in the element's statement or cut the DFL by means of additional Unit-Delay Transmission Lines inserted in the network.
  • 59. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-29 2.6 Static Transfer Functions for Voltage or Current-Controlled Resistors . The input signal of static transfer function (controlling signal) is a voltage (expressed in Volts) for Voltage-Controlled Resistors or a current (expressed in Amps) for Current-Controlled Resistors. The output signal of static transfer function is a resistance (expressed in ohms). Five static transfer functions are available: Linear, Piece-Wise Linear, File, Threshold and Hysteresis. If parameters are omitted, the default values shown will be assumed. 2.6.1 Linear Static Transfer Function . Syntax: value R V (V) for VCR I (A) for CCR  Examples: R1 4 0 10 20 5 R1 4 0 I(R2,10) 5 value is the transfer ratio expressed in ohms/Volt (A-1) for VCR or ohms/Amp for CCR.
  • 60. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-30 2.6.2 Piece-Wise Linear Static Transfer Function . Syntax: PWL( X1 R1 X2 R2 <X3 R3 <X4 R4 ... <X199 R199 <X200 R200>>>> ) X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5  V (V) for VCR I (A) for CCR R Examples: RV1 4 0 10 20 PWL( -1 10 0 10 0 100 1 100 ) RI2 4 0 I(R2,10) PWL( -10MA 10 0 10 0 100 10MA 100 ) This function implements a PieceWise Linear (PWL) behavior containing up to 200 breakpoints. Each breakpoint is defined by a pair of values (Vi,Ri) for VCR and (Ii,Ri) for CCR. Each pair of values (Xi, Ri) specifies that resistance value is Ri (in ohms) at controlling signal = Xi. The number of pairs (n) must be 2n200. Resistance value at intermediate values of controlling signal is determined by using linear interpolation on the input values. For controlling signal < X1 the static transfer function keeps the slope related to the first interval X1 X2, for controlling signal > Xn the static transfer function keeps the slope related to the last interval Xn-1 Xn. The pairs must be written in order of increasing controlling signal values (Xi  Xi+1) otherwise an error message is issued.
  • 61. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-31 2.6.3 File Static Transfer Function . Syntax: FILE( filename ) R1 R0 0 R2 R3 Rn X 2X 3X nX  V (V) for VCR I (A) for CCR R Examples: RV1 4 0 10 20 FILE( stfsamples ) RI2 4 0 I(R2,10) FILE( stfsamples ) This function implements a static transfer behavior described by a DWS-format file identified by the parameter filename. In this file the sampling timestep value is assumed to be the independent variable step (V for VCR and I for CCR). Resistance value at intermediate values of controlling signal is determined by using linear interpolation. For controlling signal < controlling signal of the first sample the static transfer function keeps the slope related to the interval between the first two samples, for controlling signal > controlling signal of the last sample the static transfer function keeps the slope related to the interval between the last two samples. File name must begin with a letter. Strings beginning with 'DC' or 'dc' are invalid file names since these strings are interpreted as the DC parameter of an independent source.
  • 62. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-32 2.6.4 Threshold Static Transfer Function . Syntax:THR( <XT <R1 <R2>>> ) R2 V (V) for VCR I (A) for CCR  R1 XT R Examples: RV1 4 0 10 20 THR( 1 1E-6 1E9 ) 1NS RI2 4 0 I(R2,10) THR( 10MA 1E-6 1E-9 ) 1NS This function implements a static transfer behavior described by an ideal threshold. For controlling signal < XT the resistance assumes the value R1, while for controlling signal > XT the resistance assumes the value R2. For controlling signal = XT the resistance assumes the value R2. The default values of the parameters are the following: parameters default values units XT (threshold) 0.0 Volts or Amps R1 (resistance) 1/GMAX ohms R2 (resistance) 1/GMIN ohms
  • 63. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-33 2.6.5 Hysteresis Static Transfer Function . Syntax: HYST( <XT1 XT2 <R1 <R2>>> ) R2 V (V) for VCR I (A) for CCR  R1 XT2XT1 R Examples: RV1 4 0 10 20 HYST( 0 1 1E-6 1E9 ) 1NS RI2 4 0 I(R2,10) HYST( 0 10MA 1E-6 1E9 ) 1NS This function implements a static transfer behavior described by an ideal hysteresis cycle. For controlling signal < XT1 the resistance assumes the value R1, while for controlling signal > XT2 the resistance assumes the value R2. In the interval XT1 XT2 the resistance assumes the value R1 if the controlling signal is increasing from values < XT1 to values > XT1, while the resistance assumes the value R2 if the controlling signal is decreasing from values > XT2 to values < XT2. The default values of the parameters are the following: parameters default values units XT1 (threshold) 0.0 Volts or Amps XT2 (threshold) 0.0 Volts or Amps R1 (resistance) 1/GMAX ohms R2 (resistance) 1/GMIN ohms
  • 64. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-34 2.7 Dynamic Transfer Functions for Voltage or Current-Controlled Resistors . The dynamic transfer function is a linear, time-invariant transformation that can be performed in the control link chain after the delay operator and before the static function. Its behavior can be described in three different ways: - In time-domain by means of its unit-step response s(t). This can implement the so called BTM (Behavioral Time Modeling) technique to obtain models directly in time-domain. - In the s-plane by means of its transfer response H(s) defined with poles and zeros in the complex frequency domain (s-plane). - In the z-plane by means of its transfer response H(z) defined with poles and zeros in the digital complex frequency domain (z-plane). DWS transforms any of these description forms into discretized time transfer functions with a time step corresponding to that chosen by the user for the simulation (TSTEP).
  • 65. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-35 2.7.1 Unit-step Dynamic Response . The time-domain unit-step response can be described in the two DWS standard ways: Piece-Wise Linear or File. - Piece-Wise Linear Syntax: s(t) = PWL( X1 Y1 X2 Y2 <X3 Y3 <X4 Y4 ... <X199 Y199 <X200 Y200>>>> ) X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 t s(t) Y6 X6 Examples: REX 4 0 10 20 1 s(t)=PWL( 0 .25 1US .5 3US 1 ) REY 4 0 I(R2,10) THR( 10MA ) s(t)=PWL( 0 .25 1US .5 3US 1 ) In this case the behavior of unit-step response s(t) is given by a PieceWise Linear behavior containing up to 200 breakpoints. The pairs of values XiYi are the breakpoint coordinates. Each pair specifies that the value of s(t) is Yi at time = Xi expressed in seconds. The number of pairs (n) must be 2n200. The value of s(t) at intermediate time values is determined by using linear interpolation on the input values. For time < X1 it is assumed that s(t)=0. For time > Xn it is assumed that s(t)=Yn. The pairs must be written in order of increasing time values (Xi < Xi+1). Use note: As far as possible it is recommended to perform the BTM (Behavioral Time Modeling) using the PWL fitting of dynamic behaviors because it is the fastest approach in terms of simulation time. Simulation time is directly proportional to the number of breakpoints n and inversely proportional to the simulation time
  • 66. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-36 step TSTEP. A further advantage (about a factor 2) in simulation speed can be achieved if the values of time coordinates Xi are chosen as integer multiples of TSTEP. - File Syntax: s(t) = FILE( filename ) t s(t) Extracted pure delay T TSTEP file samples sampled values Examples: REY 4 0 10 20 1 s(t) = FILE( srsamples ) REX 4 0 I(R2,10) 1 s(t) = FILE( srsamples ) In this case the behavior of unit-step response is given by its n samples s(kT), 0kn-1, at fixed step (T) contained in the DWS-format file identified by the parameter filename. File name must begin with a letter. Strings beginning with 'DC' or 'dc' are invalid file names since these strings are interpreted as the DC parameter of an independent source. The value of s(t) after the last sample contained in the file is assumed to hold the value of the last sample. During the simulation loop, DWS performs a time- convolution process involving coefficients obtained sampling the file contents at simulation time step (TSTEP). If TSTEP is not coincident with the file time step T, these coefficients will be calculated by means of linear interpolation between file samples. User note:
  • 67. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-37 The file representation of dynamic behavior is the most direct and accurate way to perform BTM, because DWS outputs coming from simulation or time-domain measure can be utilized without processing. Nevertheless its use can become more time-consuming than PWL due to time-convolution, that causes a quadratic growth of simulation time versus the inverse of simulation time step (1/TSTEP). Therefore, whenever possible, it is advisable to choose piece-wise-linear step response descriptions, which guarantee linear growth of simulation time versus sampling frequency. In case the file description is utilized for accuracy reasons despite its computing requirement, it is suggested to extract the possible pure delay component of s(t) and place it into the delay operator provided in the control link chain, in order to limit the number of convolution coefficients as far as possible.
  • 68. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-38 2.7.2 S-plane Dynamic Transfer Function .. Syntax: H(s) = ZEROS( Rez1 Imz1 ... Rezm Imzm ) POLES( Rep1 Imp1 ... Repn Impn ) H0=value Examples: REHS 4 0 10 20 1 H(s) = ZEROS( 0 1 ) POLES( -50K 0 -1K 25MEG ) H0=5 REHS 4 0 I(R2,10) 1 H(s) = ZEROS( 0 1 ) POLES( -50K 0 -1K 25MEG ) H0=5 The behavior of the dynamic response is described in the complex frequency plane (s) through its pole/zero representation expressed in the following general form: H(s) = K (s-s ) ... (s-s )(s-s )(s-s ) ... (s-s )(s-s ) (s-s ) ... (s-s )(s-s )(s-s ) ... (s-s )(s-s ) z1 zr z,r+1 z,r+1 * zm zm * p1 pq p,q+1 p,q+1* pn pn * where: szi = Rezi is the generic real zero, szi = Rezi + jImzi and szi* = Rezi - jImzi are the generic couple of complex conjugate zeros, spi = Repi is the generic real pole, spi = Repi + jImpi and spi* = Repi - jImpi are the generic couple of complex conjugate poles j  Re ,Im Re ,-Im Re ,Im Re ,-Im Re ,0 Re ,0 pi zi pi pi pi pi zi zi zi zi real zero real pole complex conjugate zeros complex conjugate poles
  • 69. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-39 The zeros (poles) in the s-plane are defined by a maximum of 10 pairs of values. No particular ordering of these values is required. Every pair (Rei,Imi) represents either a real root (in which case Imi=0 and Rei is the root value expressed in 1/second) or a pair of complex roots Rei+jImi, Rei-jImi (Rei expressed in 1/second and Imi expressed in radians/second). For stable systems all poles must lie in the left half-plane ( < 0) so that Repi < 0. H0 is the steady state value of the dynamic transfer function. More precisely, if k is the number of zeros in the origin, H(s)=H'(s)*sk with H'(0) not null neither infinite, then: = H'(0) = K (-s ) ...(-s )|-s | ... |-s | (-s ) ...(-s )|-s | ... |-s | z1 z,r+1-k z,m-k p1 pq p,q+1 pn z,r-k 2 2 2 2 H0 As any H(s) transfer function is subject to a bilinear transformation with sampling period T equal to the time step chosen for simulation TSTEP, the frequency response of the filter actually simulated by DWS is a warped version of that described by H(s), according to the nonlinear frequency transformation  = 2/T * tan(T/2) where  is the frequency (in radians/second) of the actually simulated filter and  is the corresponding frequency of the filter with H(s) response. This nonlinear relationship is to be taken into account whenever an H(s) description is used. When working with small simulation time step (TSTEP), some well known numerical troubles can arise due to rounding errors of signals and coefficients. Before starting the simulation, DWS automatically evaluates this possibility and, if potential troubles are detected, a specific warning message will be issued at standard output.
  • 70. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-40 2.7.3 Z-plane Dynamic Transfer Function .. Syntax: H(z) = ZEROS( Rez1 Imz1 ... Rezm Imzm ) POLES( Rep1 Imp1 ... Repn Impn ) H0=value T=value Examples: REHZ 4 0 10 20 1 H(z) = ZEROS( 0 1 ) POLES( 50M 0 ) H0=5 T=1US REHZ 4 0 I(R2,10) 1 H(z) = ZEROS( 0 1 ) POLES( 50M 0 ) H0=5 T=1US The behavior of the dynamic response is described in the digital complex plane z through its pole/zero representation expressed in the general form: H(z) = K (z-z ) ... (z-z )(z-z )(z-z ) ... (z-z )(z-z ) (z-z ) ... (z-z )(z-z )(z-z ) ... (z-z )(z-z ) z1 zr z,r+1 z,r+1 * zm zm * p1 pq p,q+1 p,q+1 * pn pn * where: zzi = Rezi is the generic real zero, zzi = Rezi + jImzi and zzi* = Rezi - jImzi are the generic couple of complex conjugate zeros, zpi = Repi is the generic real pole, zpi = Repi + jImpi and zpi* = Repi - jImpi are the generic couple of complex conjugate poles Re ,0zi Re ,-Impi pi Re ,0pi Re ,Impi pi Re ,Imzi zi Re ,-Imzi zi real zero real pole complex conjugate complex conjugate zeros poles z = -1 ( = ) z = 1  ( = 0 ) Im[z] Re[z]
  • 71. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-41 The zeros (poles) in the z-plane are defined by a maximum of 10 pairs of values. No particular ordering of these values is required. Every pair (Rei,Imi) represents either a real root (in which case Imi=0 and Rei is the root value) or a pair of complex roots Rei+jImi, Rei-jImi. For stable systems all zeros and poles must lie within the unit circle. H0 is the zero frequency value (z=1) of the dynamic transfer function. More precisely, if k is the number of zeros for z=1, H(z)=H'(z)*(z-1)k with H'(1) not null neither infinite, then H0=H'(1). T is the sampling period (in seconds) that has been used to time discretize the dynamic transfer function.
  • 72. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-42 2.8 Linear Capacitors . N -N + V0 General form: CXXXXXXX N+ N- value <IC=V0> Examples: C10 10 0 1NF COSC 15 32 100P IC=2V N+ and N- are the positive and negative element nodes, respectively. Value is the capacitance in Farads. The optional initial condition.. is the initial (time-zero) value of capacitor voltage V0 (in Volts). Note that the initial conditions (if any) apply 'only' if the UIC option. is specified on the .TRAN statement. Note: As already mentioned in 1.2.3, the default integration method for linear capacitor is trapezoidal corresponding to the open stub model. Each one-port grounded capacitor is dealt with as a "short" open stub: stub model C N Z0 = TSTEP 2C TD = TSTEP 2 N Stub model of one-port grounded capacitor.
  • 73. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-43 In case of two-port capacitor, the automatic conversion (see 1.2.3) will apply before the simulation loop. Cxxx Z0 = TSTEP 2C TD = TSTEP 2 N+ N- Cxxx AS.Cxxx N+ N- AS.Cxxx N+ N- For grounded capacitors, a "link" transmission line model can be specified using the unit-delay line equivalent (see also 2.12): Z0 = TSTEP C TD = TSTEP TxxxVo N+ N-Io N+ N- unit-delay line with the following syntax: TXXXXXXX N+ N- C=value <IC=V0,I0> This form can be used instead of normal SPICE-like form when decoupling between ports N+ and N- is required.
  • 74. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-44 2.9 Linear Inductors . N -N + I0 General form: LXXXXXXX N+ N- value <IC=I0> Examples: L1 24 0 10NH LOSC 32 65 1U IC=22.3MA N+ and N- are the positive and negative element nodes, respectively. Value is the inductance in Henries. The optional initial condition is the initial (time-zero) value of inductor current I0 (in Amps) that flows from N+, through the inductor, to N-. Note that the initial conditions.. (if any) apply 'only' if the UIC option. is specified on the .TRAN statement. Note: The default integration method for one-port grounded inductor is trapezoidal, corresponding to the shorted stub model. Each one-port grounded inductor is dealt with as "short" shorted stub. stub model L N Z0 = TSTEP 2L TD = TSTEP 2 N Io Io Stub model of one-port grounded inductor.
  • 75. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-45 As already mentioned in 1.2.3, the default integration method for two-port linear inductor corresponds to the "link" transmission-line model. This assures decoupling between ports N+ and N-. Z0 = TSTEP L TD = TSTEP Lxxx N+ N- Io N+ N- unit-delay line Link transmission-line model of two-port inductor. If a trapezoidal integration method is preferred, it is necessary to use the following equivalent: Lxxx Z0 = TSTEP 2L TD = TSTEP 2 N+ N- Lxxx ASL N+ N- ASLN+ N- Io Io Io NS ASL N+ N- NS LXXX NS 0 value <IC=I0>
  • 76. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-46 2.10 Coupled Inductors General form: KXXXXXXX LYYYYYYY LZZZZZZZ value Examples: K43 LAA LBB 0.12345 KXFRMR L1 L2 0.87 LYYYYYYY and LZZZZZZZ are the names of the two coupled inductors, and value is the coupling coefficient, K, which must be greater than 0 and less than 1. Using the 'dot' convention, place a 'dot' on the first node of each inductor. Note that all the coupled inductors must have different names. DWS groups together the coupled inductors and then converts each group into an equivalent model. Example Two inductors LYYY and LZZZ, coupled by a coefficient of value value, will be converted in the following elements:
  • 77. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-47 L ngroup LYYY LZZZ M LZZZ M L ngroup LYYY LZZZ M LYYY M L ngroup LYYY LZZZ M M M value LYYY LZZZ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1 2 1 2 2 2 2              where ngroup identifies the group. Note: If a large number of coupled inductors is present, simulation results could be unstable. In this case, if the circuit implements an actual configuration, the simulation convergence could be reached by reducing the simulation time step.
  • 78. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-48 2.11 Unbalanced Transmission Lines . N+ N- I 0 V0 Z T0 D General form: TXXXXXXX N+ N- Z0=value TD=value <IC=V0,I0> TXXXXXXX N+ 0 N- 0 Z0=value TD=value <IC=V0,I0> Examples: T1 1 2 Z0=50 TD=10NS TUNB 10 0 20 0 Z0=100 TD=1NS This element statement defines a lossless unbalanced transmission line connected between ports N+ and N-. Its syntax is SPICE compatible if the ground node 0 is specified at both ports. A shorter DWS-syntax where ground node 0 is omitted at both ports is also available. Z0 is the characteristic impedance (ohms). The electrical length of the line is expressed in the form of transmission delay time TD (s). The parameter TD will be dealt with in two different modes according to the DELAYMETH option statement, as shown in 1.2.5. If the parameter TD is set to a value < TSTEP, the discretized delay will assume the value TSTEP. As default, the line delay will be rounded to the integer multiple of TSTEP closest to TD. This element models only one unbalanced propagation mode. The optional initial condition specification consists of the initial (time-zero) values of the voltage V0 (in Volts) at the transmission line ports and of the current I0 (in Amps) that flows from N+, through the transmission line, to N-.
  • 79. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-49 The initial conditions (if any) apply 'only' if the UIC option is specified on the .TRAN statement. Unbalanced transmission line ports cannot be directly connected to ground by specifying 0 as a port identifier: an external one-port linear resistor whose conductance is Gmax must be used to short the grounded port. As specified for all DWS element ports, a transmission line port cannot be left open. A resistor of conductance Gmin must be used to terminate the open port. Examples: shorted line: network 10 20 TSHORTED 10 20 Z0=50 TD=1NS RSHORT 20 0 0 open line: network 10 20 TOPEN 10 20 Z0=50 TD=1NS ROPEN 20 0 1E9
  • 80. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-50 2.12 Balanced Transmission Lines . N1 N2 N3 N4 Z TD0V I0 0 I0 General form: TXXXXXXX N1 N2 N3 N4 Z0=value TD=value <IC=V0,I0> Example: TBAL 1 2 3 4 Z0=100 TD=1NS This element statement defines a 4-port lossless transmission line carrying only one propagating mode (balanced mode) between balanced ports formed by the pairs N1, N2 and N3, N4. If both N2 and N4 are defined as ground (0) node, this element becomes an unbalanced transmission line propagating only one unbalanced mode (see 2.10). Z0 is the balanced characteristic impedance. (ohms). The electrical length of the line is expressed in the form of transmission delay time.. TD (s). As already pointed out at 1.2.3, balanced ports are automatically converted during the two-port conversion, so that the balanced transmission line is converted to two series adaptors and an unbalanced transmission line of impedance Z0 and delay TD. All the considerations regarding TD already made in 2.10 apply as well in this case. The parameter TD will be dealt with in two different modes according to the DELAYMETH option statement, as shown in 1.2.5. If the parameter TD is set to a value < TSTEP, the discretized delay will assume the value TSTEP. Since this element models only one propagating mode, in steady state the differential voltage VN1-VN2 is equal to VN3-VN4, while, in general, VN1VN3
  • 81. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-51 and VN2VN4. To simulate the propagation of two modes (even and odd..), two transmission-line elements connected by means of bimodal adaptors are required (see bimodal adaptor for further clarification). The optional initial condition specification consists of the initial (time-zero) values of the differential voltage V0 (in Volts) at the balanced ports ( V0 = VN1- VN2 = VN3-VN4) and of the current I0 (in Amps) that flows from N1, through the transmission line, to N3. The initial conditions (if any) apply 'only' if the UIC option. is specified on the .TRAN statement. Only ports N2 and N4 can be simultaneously connected to ground, specifying 0 as port identifier, to define an unbalanced line. In general, to ground a port it is necessary to connect it to an external one-port resistor whose conductance is Gmax. As specified for all DWS element ports, a transmission line port cannot be left open. A resistor of conductance Gmin must be used to terminate the open port.
  • 82. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-52 2.13 Unit-Delay Transmission Lines . N+ N- Z0 I 0 V0 ,TSTEP TRUE UDTL N+ N- CAPACITIVE UDTL N+ N- INDUCTIVE UDTL General form: TXXXXXXX N+ N- Z0=value <IC=V0,I0> TXXXXXXX N+ N- C=value <IC=V0,I0> TXXXXXXX N+ N- L=value <IC=V0,I0> Examples: T1 1 2 Z0=50 TCAP 7 12 C=1PF TIND 10 20 L=10NH Unit-Delay Transmission Lines (UDTL) are a particular type of unbalanced lines connecting ports N+ and N-, characterized by having a delay corresponding to simulation time step (TSTEP). UDTLs are normally used for decoupling. purposes and/or for defining reference impedance (see 1.2.4).. The characteristic impedance of the line may be expressed in one of three forms. In true Unit-Delay Transmission Lines impedance Z0 (ohm) is specified directly and doesn't depend on TSTEP. In Capacitive Unit-Delay Transmission Lines a capacitance C (Farads) is given and Z0 is set to TSTEP/C. In Inductive Unit-Delay Transmission Lines an inductance
  • 83. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-53 L (Henries) is specified and Z0 is set to L/TSTEP. The delay of the line is always set to TSTEP. The Capacitive UDTL can be considered also as a way to define a grounded capacitor modeled by means of a minimum delay link transmission line (see 2.8). The Inductive UDTL corresponds to a two-port inductor defined as in 2.9, because of the "link" default model for inductors. Both Capacitive and Inductive UDTL are used to define the impedance by adding to the network an element whose additional effect (loading) is capacitive or inductive independently from TSTEP. The optional initial condition specification consists of the initial (time-zero) values of the voltage V0 (in Volts) at the transmission line ports and of the current I0 (in Amps) that flows from N+, through the transmission line, to N-. The initial conditions (if any) apply 'only' if the UIC option is specified on the .TRAN statement. Unit-Delay Transmission Line ports cannot be directly connected to ground by specifying 0 as a port identifier: an external one-port linear resistor whose conductance is Gmax must be used to short the grounded port. As specified for all DWS element ports, a transmission line port cannot be left open. A resistor of conductance Gmin must be used to terminate the open port.
  • 84. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-54 2.14 Ideal Transformers . General form: NXXXXXXX N1 N2 N3 N4 n or NXXXXXXX N1 N2 N3 N4 n Z0=value NXXXXXXX N1 N2 N3 N4 n C=value NXXXXXXX N1 N2 N3 N4 n L=value or NXXXXXXX N1 N2 N3 N4 n Z01=value NXXXXXXX N1 N2 N3 N4 n C1=value NXXXXXXX N1 N2 N3 N4 n L1=value or NXXXXXXX N1 N2 N3 N4 n Z02=value NXXXXXXX N1 N2 N3 N4 n C2=value NXXXXXXX N1 N2 N3 N4 n L2=value This element statement defines an Ideal Transformer. between the ports formed by the pairs N1, N2 and N3, N4. The parameter n is the turns ratio of the transformer. The definition equations of the transformer are represented by: VN3,N4 = n VN1,N2 IN3 = - (1/n) IN1 IN2 = - IN1 IN4 = - IN3 'Dot' convention: the 'dot' is on the first node of each port. If the optional parameters Z0x, Cx or Lx are not given, the reference impedance at the two ports will automatically be set by the circuit elements connected to the Ideal Transformer. If, due to network topology, the reference impedance at the two ports cannot be defined, one of the optional parameters must be specified. In this way two additional transmission lines with a delay of TSTEP/2, connected at N1 N3 N2 N4 nI I I I V V N 1 N 2 N 4 N 3 N 1 , N 2 N 3 , N 4
  • 85. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-55 the intrinsic Ideal Transformer, decouple it from the other elements of the network. The characteristic impedance of these lines may be expressed in one of three forms: directly as impedance Z0 (ohms), as capacitance C (Farads), so Z0 is set to TSTEP/(2*C), or as inductance L (Henries), so Z0 is set to 2*L/TSTEP. If the Ideal Transformer is described with no node directly connected to ground (node 0), the additional lines are true or capacitive or inductive balanced transmission lines (Fig.2.13.1); if one of the nodes of each port of the Ideal Transformer is ground node (node 0), the additional line is a true or capacitive or inductive unbalanced transmission line (Fig.2.13.2). N1 N2 TD=TSTEP/2 L /2p2L /2p1 TD=TSTEP/2 N3 N4 Zp2Zp1 N1 N2 Cp1 N3 N4 Cp2 L /2L /2 p2p1 N3 N4 N1 N2 Fig.2.13.1: Electrical equivalents of Ideal Transformer when additional parameters Z0, C, L are specified for decoupling. Another method to follow, pointed out in 1.2.4, is to use a Unit-Delay Transmission Line for decoupling purposes, but in this case an additional line with a delay of TSTEP is introduced in the network, leading to an additional transient effect greater than that due to internal Z0 setting. Nx TD=TSTEP/2 Lp1 TD=TSTEP/2 Ny Zp2Zp1 Nx Cp1 Ny Cp2 NyNx Lp2 Fig.2.13.2: Electrical equivalents of Ideal Transformer with grounded nodes when additional parameters Z0, C, L are specified for decoupling. The reference impedance at the two ports can assume the same value or different values depending on the optional parameters, according to the following table: Parameters Zp1 Zp2 Cp1 Cp2 Lp1 Lp2 Z0, C, L Z0 Z0 C C L L Z01, C1, L1 Z01 n2Z01 C1 C1/n2 L1 n2L1 Z02, C2, L2 Z02/n2 Z02 n2C2 C2 L2/n2 L2
  • 86. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-56 2.15 Junction Diodes . N+ N- General form: DXXXXXXX N+ N- MNAME <AREA> DXXXXXXX N+ N- MNAME <AREA> Z0=value DXXXXXXX N+ N- MNAME <AREA> C=value DXXXXXXX N+ N- MNAME <AREA> L=value Examples: DBRIDGE 40 50 DMOD 3 DTERM 20 0 DIODE Z0=50 The Diode statement must reference a particular diode model, described in a .MODEL statement. N+ and N- are the positive and negative nodes, respectively. MNAME is the model name. Model name must begin with a letter. Strings beginning with 'DC' or 'dc' are invalid model names since these strings are interpreted as the DC parameter of an independent source. The optional parameter AREA is the area factor that simulates the effects of geometry on the diodes. If the area factor is omitted, a value of 1.0 is assumed. If the optional parameters Z0, C or L are not given, the reference impedance at the N+ and N- ports will be automatically set by the circuit elements connected to the Diode. If, due to network topology, the port reference impedance cannot be defined, one of the three optional parameters must be specified. In this way an additional transmission line with a delay of TSTEP/2, connected at the intrinsic Diode, decouples it from the other elements of the network. The characteristic impedance of this line may be expressed in one of three forms: directly as impedance Z0 (ohms), as capacitance C (Farads), so Z0 is set to TSTEP/(2*C), or as inductance L (Henries), so Z0 is set to 2*L/TSTEP.
  • 87. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-57 If the Diode is described as two-port element (i.e. neither N+ nor N- is ground node), the additional line is a true or capacitive or inductive balanced transmission line (fig.2.14.1); if the Diode is described as one-port element (i.e. either N+ or N- is ground node), the additional line is a true or capacitive or inductive unbalanced transmission line (fig.2.14.2). intrinsic diode N+ N- C N+ N- L/2 L/2 TD=TSTEP/2 Z0 N+ N- Fig.2.14.1: Electrical equivalents of two-port diode when additional parameters Z0,C,L are specified for decoupling. Another method to follow, pointed out in 1.2.4, is to use a Unit-Delay Transmission Line for decoupling purposes, but in this case an additional line with a delay of TSTEP is introduced in the network, leading to an additional transient effect greater than that due to internal Z0 setting. intrinsic diode Z0 TD=TSTEP/2 N N C N L Fig.2.14.2: Electrical equivalents of one-port diode when additional parameters Z0,C,L are specified for decoupling. - Diode Parameters in .MODEL Statement Diode Model: .MODEL MNAME D <PNAME1=PVAL1> <PNAME2=PVAL2> ...
  • 88. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-58 The .MODEL statement specifies the set of model parameters that will be used by diodes. MNAME is the model name. Parameter values are defined by appending the parameter name, as given below, followed by an equal sign and the parameter value. If a model parameter is omitted, the default value is assumed. The dc characteristics of the diode are determined by the parameters IS and N. An ohmic resistance, RS, is included. Charge storage effects are modeled by a transit time, TT, and a nonlinear depletion layer capacitance which is determined by the parameters CJO, VJ, and M. The temperature dependence of the saturation current is defined by the parameters EG, the energy, and XTI, the saturation current temperature exponent. Diode model parameters : PNAME default values units *IS : saturation current 1.0E-14 Amps *RS : ohmic resistance 0 Ohm N : emission coefficient 1 TT : transit time 0 seconds *CJO : zero-bias junction capacitance 0 Farads VJ : junction potential 1 Volts M : grading coefficient 0.5 EG : activation energy 1.11 eV XTI : saturation-current temp. exp. 3 FC : coefficient for forward-bias depletion capacitance formula 0.5 * parameter value changes when area not equal to 1. - Diode Parameters in .OPTIONS Statement .OPTIONS <MODLIST> If MODLIST is specified, the program lists diode model parameters.
  • 89. Copyright 1985-2013 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Passive Elements DWS Chapter 2 2-59 - Diode Parameters in .TEMP Statement .TEMP value value is the temperature in degrees C. If no .TEMP statement appears in the circuit description, the default value is 27 degrees C.
  • 91. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Independent Sources DWS Chapter 3 3-1 Chapter 3 I n d e p e n d e n t S o u r c e s 3. 3 3.1 Independent Voltage Sources 3.2 Independent Current Sources 3.3 Independent Source Functions 3.3.1 DC Source Function 3.3.2 Pulse Source Function 3.3.3 PulsePoly Source Function 3.3.4 PulseErfc Source Function 3.3.5 Erfc Source Function 3.3.6 Delta Source Function 3.3.7 Sinusoidal Source Function 3.3.8 Piece-Wise Linear Source Function 3.3.9 PulsePwl Source Function 3.3.10 File Source Function 3.3.11 PulseFile Source Function 3.4 Source Functions with a Parameter Controlled by a Node Voltage 3.5 Binary Digit Sequence 3.5.1 Sequence Definition 3.5.2 Single Sequence
  • 92. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Independent Sources DWS Chapter 3 3-2 3.5.3 Periodic Sequence 3.5.4 Burst Sequence
  • 93. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Independent Sources DWS Chapter 3 3-3 3.1 Independent Voltage Sources (Thevenin Equivalent) . N - N + + V R General form: VXXXXXXX N+ N- source <R> N+ and N- are the positive and negative nodes, respectively. Positive current is assumed to flow from the positive node, through the source, to the negative node. Source is the independent source function. The optional parameter R is the internal resistance (in ohms) and may be positive (1/GMAX  R  1/GMIN) or negative (-1/GMIN  R  -1/GMAX). If the parameter R is omitted or set to zero, the default value 1/GMAX will be assumed (see the .OPTIONS statement).
  • 94. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Independent Sources DWS Chapter 3 3-4 3.2 Independent Current Sources (Norton Equivalent) . N - N + RI General form: IXXXXXXX N+ N- source <R> N+ and N- are the positive and negative nodes, respectively. A current source of positive value will force current to flow from the N+ node, through the source, to the N- node. Source is the independent source function. The optional parameter R is the internal resistance (in ohms) and may be positive (1/GMAX  R  1/GMIN) or negative (-1/GMIN  R  -1/GMAX). If the parameter R is omitted or set to zero, the default value 1/GMIN will be assumed (see the .OPTIONS statement).
  • 95. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Independent Sources DWS Chapter 3 3-5 3.3 Independent Source Functions . Eleven independent source functions are available: DC, Pulse, PulsePoly, PulseErfc, Erfc, Delta, Sinusoidal, Piece-Wise Linear, PulsePwl, File and PulseFile. The DC, Pulse, Sinusoidal and Piece-Wise Linear functions have the same syntax and meaning of the corresponding functions used in SPICE. The PulsePoly, PulseErfc, PulsePwl and PulseFile functions are the extensions of the Pulse function when the behavior of pulse edges can be expressed in several ways including polynomial, piecewise linear and generic behaviors described in a DWS output file. 3.3.1 DC Source Function . Syntax: DC <(>VDC<)> VDC t V(V) I(A) Example: VIN 4 0 DC( -5 ) The source value is time-invariant (e.g. a power supply). The value may optionally be enclosed by round brackets.
  • 96. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Independent Sources DWS Chapter 3 3-6 3.3.2 Pulse Source Function . Syntax: PULSE( V1 V2 <TD <TR <TF <PW <PER>>>>> ) V1 V2 0 TD TR PW PER TF t I(A) V(V) Example: VIN 4 0 PULSE( -1 1 5NS 1NS 1NS 24NS 50NS ) parameters default values units V1 (initial value) Volts or Amps V2 (pulsed value) Volts or Amps TD (delay time) 0.0 seconds TR (rise time) TSTEP seconds TF (fall time) TSTEP seconds PW (pulse width) TSTOP seconds PER(period) TSTOP seconds A single pulse so specified is described by the following breakpoint table: time value 0 V1 TD V1 TD+TR V2 TD+TR+PW V2 TD+TR+PW+TF V1 TSTOP V1 Intermediate points are determined by linear interpolation.
  • 97. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Independent Sources DWS Chapter 3 3-7 3.3.3 PulsePoly Source Function . Syntax: PULSE( V1 V2 <TD <TR <TF <PW <PER>>>>> ) POLY( C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 ) V1 V2 0 TD TR PW PER TF t V(V) I(A) Example: VIN 4 0 PULSE( -1 1 5NS 1NS 1NS 24NS 50NS ) POLY( 0 .13 -.3.24 23.45 -36.62 21.17 -3.89 ) This function is an extension of the basic pulse function, when rise and fall edge behaviors are not linear but can be fitted by a higher-degree polinomial. The meaning and the default values of PulsePoly parameters are like those of the corresponding parameters of Pulse, unless edge shape is described by a 6-degree polynomial in PulsePoly source. C0, C1, ... C6 are the coefficients of the polynomial.  BASIC POLY DEFINITION WINDOW 0 1 0 1 RISE-EDGE WINDOW V1 V2 TR FALL-EDGE WINDOW V1 V2 TF t POLY(t) POLY(t)= 6 n=0 Cn tn =1 n=0 6 Cn Fig.3.3.3.1: Mapping of basic poly definition window into rise and fall windows.
  • 98. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Independent Sources DWS Chapter 3 3-8 The polynomial is defined between 0 and 1 and, at the lower and upper limits of this range, must assume the values 0 and 1 respectively, in order that the actual edge shape will reflect the polynomial shape. The polynomial definition window will be automatically scaled to the actual windows TR, V1, V2 and TF, V2, V1.(fig.3.3.3.1).
  • 99. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Independent Sources DWS Chapter 3 3-9 3.3.4 PulseErfc Source Function . Syntax: PULSE( V1 V2 <TD <TR <TF <PW <PER>>>>> ) ERFC V1 V2 0 TD TR PW PER TF t V(V) I(A) Example: VIN 4 0 PULSE( -1 1 5NS 1NS 1NS 24NS 50NS ) ERFC This function is an extension of the basic pulse function when rise and fall edges can be fitted by a complementary error function (erfc) behavior. The meaning and the default values of PulseErfc parameters are like those of the corresponding parameters of Pulse, unless edge shape is that of erfc. The definition window of erfc will be automatically scaled to the rise and fall edge windows.
  • 100. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Independent Sources DWS Chapter 3 3-10 3.3.5 Erfc Source Function . Syntax: ERFC( V1 V2 TD TR ) V1 V2 0 TD TR t V(V) I(A) Example: VIN 4 0 ERFC( -1 1 5NS 1NS ) parameters units V1 (initial value) Volts or Amps V2 (final value) Volts or Amps TD (delay time) seconds TR (rise time) seconds The shape of the waveform is described by the following table: time value 0 to TD V1 TD+TR to TSTOP V2 from TD to TD+TR the edge shape is like the shape of erfc function.
  • 101. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Independent Sources DWS Chapter 3 3-11 3.3.6 Delta Source Function . Syntax: DELTA( <V <TD>> ) V 0 TD t V(V) I(A) Example: VIN 4 0 DELTA( 1 5NS ) parameters default values units V (impulse value) 1.0 Volts or Amps TD (delay time) 0.0 seconds This function implements a delayed Dirac's pulse behavior according to the following table: time value 0 to TD- 0 TD V TD+ to TSTOP 0
  • 102. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Independent Sources DWS Chapter 3 3-12 3.3.7 Sinusoidal Source Function . Syntax: SIN( VO VA <FREQ <TD <THETA>>> ) 0 TD V0 VA 1/ FREQ THETA t V(V) I(A) Example: VIN 4 0 SIN( 0 1 100MEG 5NS 10MEG ) parameters default values units VO (offset) Volts or Amps VA (amplitude) Volts or Amps FREQ (frequency) 1/TSTOP Hz TD (delay) 0.0 seconds THETA (damping factor) 0.0 1/seconds This function implements an exponentially decaying sinusoidal behavior described by the following table: time value 0 to TD Y0 TD to TSTOP VO + VA*exp(-(t-TD)*THETA)*sin(2*FREQ*(t-TD))
  • 103. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Independent Sources DWS Chapter 3 3-13 3.3.8 Piece-Wise Linear Source Function . Syntax: PWL( T1 V1 T2 V2 <T3 V3 <T4 V4 ... <T199 V199 <T200 V200>>>> ) 0 tT1 T2 T3 T4 T5 V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V(V) I(A) Example: VIN 4 0 PWL( 10NS -5 11NS -2 15NS -2 16NS -5 ) This function implements a piece-wise linear behavior containing up to 200 breakpoints. Each breakpoint is defined by a pair of values Ti,Vi. Each pair of values (Ti, Vi) specifies that the value of the source is Vi (in Volts or Amps) at time=Ti (in seconds). The number of pairs (n) must be 2n200. The value of the source at intermediate values of time is determined by using linear interpolation on the input values. For time < T1 the value of the source is V1, for time > Tn the value of the source is Vn. The pairs must be written in order of increasing time values (Ti  Ti+1), otherwise a specific error message is issued.
  • 104. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Independent Sources DWS Chapter 3 3-14 3.3.9 PulsePwl Source Function . Syntax: PULSE( V1 V2 <TD <TR <TF <PW <PER>>>>> ) PWL( T1 Y1 T2 Y2 <T3 Y3 <T4 Y4 ... <T199 Y199 <T200 Y200>>>> ) V1 V2 0 TD TR PW PER TF t tT1 T2 T3 T4 T5 Tn Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 YnV(V) I(A) Example: VIN 4 0 PULSE( -1 1 5NS 2NS 2NS 23NS 50NS ) PWL( 0 -1 .3NS -.5 .6NS 0 1NS .5 1.4NS .8 2NS 1 ) This function is an extension of the basic Pulse function when rise and fall edges can be fitted by a piece-wise linear behavior. The meaning and the default values of PulsePwl parameters are like those of the corresponding parameters of Pulse, unless edge shape is described by the pairs of values Ti, Yi in PulsePwl source. The pairs, written in order of increasing time values (Ti  Ti+1), determine edge shape, while the actual value of the source is defined by the parameters V1, V2, TR, TF. The PWL definition window will be automatically scaled to the actual rise and fall edge windows. The piece-wise linear swing Yn - Y1 (n: number of pairs) will become the pulse swing V2 - V1, while the time interval Tn - T1 will become TR for the rise edge and TF for the fall edge.
  • 105. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Independent Sources DWS Chapter 3 3-15 3.3.10 File Source Function . Syntax: FILE( filename ) V1V0 0 t V2 V3 Vn T 2T 3T nT V(V) I(A) Example: VIN 4 0 FILE( fdosamples ) This function implements a source whose behavior is described by a DWS- format file identified by the parameter filename. In this file, a sampling time step (T) will be specified. If the simulation time step (TSTEP in .TRAN statement) is not coincident with the file time step, the source values will be determined using linear interpolation of the values contained in the file. After the last sample contained in the file, the source value is assumed to be equal to the value of the last sample. File name must begin with a letter. Strings beginning with 'DC' or 'dc' are invalid file names since these strings are interpreted as the DC parameter of an independent source.
  • 106. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Independent Sources DWS Chapter 3 3-16 3.3.11 PulseFile Source Function . Syntax: PULSE( NC NC <TD <NC <NC <PW <PER>>>>> ) FILE(filename) 0 TD PW PER t t0 Y1 Y0 n*T Yn T 2T Y2 V(V) I(A) Example: VIN 4 0 PULSE( 0 0 5NS 0 0 23NS 50NS ) FILE( fdosamples ) This function is an extension of the basic Pulse function when rise and fall edges can be described by a behavior contained in a DWS-format file identified by the parameter filename. File name must begin with a letter. Strings beginning with 'DC' or 'dc' are invalid file names. The meaning and the default values of the parameters TD, PW and PER are like those of the corresponding parameters of Pulse, whereas initial value, pulsed value, rise time, fall time and edge shape are determined by voltage or current samples versus time contained in the file. For this reason the initial, pulsed, rise and fall time values specified in the PULSE syntax will be not considered. parameter value V0 (initial value) Y0 (1st file sample) V1 (final value) Yn (last file sample) TR (rise time) n * T TF (fall time) n * T
  • 107. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Independent Sources DWS Chapter 3 3-17 If the simulation time step (TSTEP in .TRAN statement) is not coincident with the file time step, the source values will be determined using linear interpolation of the values contained in the file.
  • 108. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Independent Sources DWS Chapter 3 3-18 3.4 Source Functions with a Parameter Controlled by a Node Voltage . Pulse, PulsePoly, PulseErfc, PulsePwl, PulseFile and Sinusoidal sources may have one of their parameters controlled by a user-specified node voltage V(nodename). This feature allows the user to describe several kinds of modulated sources: it is possible to modulate phase., amplitude., pulse width, period or frequency... Example: VAMOD 1 0 SIN( 0 1V 1KHZ ) ICARRIER 100 200 SIN( 0 V(1) 100MEG )
  • 109. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Independent Sources DWS Chapter 3 3-19 3.5 Binary Digit Sequence . Bit sequences can be generated as extension of available PULSE functions. The bit string is specified by the additional parameter SEQUENCE according to the following syntax: Pulse PULSE( V1 V2 <TD <TR <TF <PW <PER>>>>> ) SEQUENCE PulsePoly PULSE( V1 V2 <TD <TR <TF <PW <PER>>>>> ) POLY( C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 ) SEQUENCE PulseErfc PULSE( V1 V2 <TD <TR <TF <PW <PER>>>>> ) ERFC SEQUENCE PulsePwl PULSE( V1 V2 <TD <TR <TF <PW <PER>>>>> ) PWL( T1 Y1 T2 Y2 <T3 Y3 <T4 Y4 ... <T199 Y199 <T200 Y200>>>> ) SEQUENCE PulseFile PULSE( NC NC <TD <NC <NC <PW <PER>>>>> ) FILE(filename) SEQUENCE PULSE function arguments are utilized to define single bit shape (V1, V2, TR, TF, PW, PER) and starting delay of output bit stream (TD). TD represents the first bit delay so that from time 0 to TD output value is V1. The argument PER assumes the meaning of sequence bit-time. Both Return-to-Zero (RZ) and Non-Return-to-Zero (NRZ) sequence encoding can be implemented. V2 V1 V2 V1 PERTD t t t RZ NRZ 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
  • 110. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Independent Sources DWS Chapter 3 3-20 If PER TR + PW + TF, the encoding scheme is RZ; the shape of a single bit is described by the following table where s(n) represents the nth bit in the sequence (n  1): time s(n) value TD to TD + TR 0 V1 1 (*) TD + TR to TD + TR + PW 0 V1 1 V2 TD + TR + PW to TD + TR + PW + TF 0 V1 1 (*) TD + TR + PW + TF to TD + PER 0 V1 1 V1 (*) The shape of the rise and fall edges is defined by source function. If PER < TR + PW + TF, the encoding scheme is NRZ; the shape of a single bit is described by the following table: time s(n-1) s(n) value TD to TD + TR 0 1 (*) 1 1 V2 TD to TD + TF 0 0 V1 1 0 (*) TD + TR to TD + PER - 1 V2 TD + TF to TD + PER - 0 V1 (*) The shape of the rise and fall edges is defined by source function. 3.5.1 Sequence Definition . The bit sequence can be specified directly on text by means of a string of "0" and "1" or by reference to a file containing the same string. File name must begin
  • 111. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Independent Sources DWS Chapter 3 3-21 with a letter. Strings beginning with 'DC' or 'dc' are invalid file names since these strings are interpreted as the DC parameter of an independent source. Three types of sequences can be described: single aperiodic sequence, periodic sequence and burst sequence. 3.5.2 Single Sequence .. Syntax: SSEQ( seqdescr ) Examples: SSEQ( binary.dat ) SSEQ( 1001 0001 ) Using single sequence, the defined bit string is scanned only once and, after reaching its end, the output will assume the initial value. seqdescr is either the name of a file containing a binary sequence, or a binary sequence of 0's and 1's. This binary sequence may contain separators (blank, tab, newline) placed in any position, that will be ignored. The maximum string length between two consecutive separators is limited to 1024 characters. The sequence file format accepts "0", "1" and "X" (don't care) characters as valid sequence symbols, while blank, tab and newline characters can be used as separators, that will be ignored during the sequence generation. Comments lines, characterized by a "*" character in first column will also be ignored, e.g.: * start sequence 0101XX01 1000X0XX * end sequence
  • 112. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Independent Sources DWS Chapter 3 3-22 3.5.3 Periodic Sequence .. Syntax: PSEQ( seqdescr ) Examples: PSEQ( binary.dat ) PSEQ( 1001 0001 ) Using periodic sequence, the output will be repeated cyclically, starting immediately after a complete scan of defined bit sequence. Sequence period equals sequence duration (N*PER). seqdescr is the same as in single aperiodic sequence. If x(n) is the sequence described by seqdescr for 1  n  N, the complete sequence is described by s(n) = x(n - kN), where k is any integer. 3.5.4 Burst Sequence . Syntax: SSEQ( seqdescr ) BPER=value Examples: SSEQ( binary.dat ) BPER=10US SSEQ( 1001 0001 ) BPER=10US Using burst sequence the output will be repeated cyclically with a period specified by the parameter BPER (in seconds), that is usually far greater than sequence duration (N*PER). seqdescr is the same as in single aperiodic sequence. If x(n) is the sequence described by seqdescr for 1  n  N, the complete sequence is described by the following table: 1 + k * BPER/PER  n  N + k * BPER/PER x(n-k*BPER/PER) N + k * BPER/PER < n  (k+1) * BPER/PER 0 where k is any integer.
  • 113. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Independent Sources DWS Chapter 3 3-23 For example, using the sequence 10010001, the three types of sequence definition will generate (with NRZ, TR=0, TF=0): t t tsingle sequence periodic sequence burst sequence 8*PER BPER
  • 114. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Independent Sources DWS Chapter 3 3-24
  • 115. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Controlled Sources DWS Chapter 4 4-1 Chapter 4 C o n t r o l l e d S o u r c e s . 4. 4 4.1 Voltage-Controlled Voltage Sources 4.2 Voltage-Controlled Current Sources 4.3 Current-Controlled Voltage Sources 4.4 Current-Controlled Current Sources 4.5 Multiplying Voltage-Controlled Voltage Sources 4.6 Multiplying Voltage-Controlled Current Sources 4.7 Static Transfer Functions 4.7.1 Linear Static Transfer Function 4.7.2 Piece-Wise Linear Static Transfer Function 4.7.3 File Static Transfer Function 4.7.4 Threshold Static Transfer Function 4.7.5 Hysteresis Static Transfer Function
  • 116. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Controlled Sources DWS Chapter 4 4-2 4.8 Dynamic Transfer Function for Voltage or Current Controlled Sources 4.8.1 Unit-step Dynamic Response 4.8.2 S-plane Dynamic Transfer Function 4.8.3 Z-plane Dynamic Transfer Function
  • 117. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Controlled Sources DWS Chapter 4 4-3 4.1 Voltage-Controlled Voltage Sources . - NC+ NC- DELAY D.T.F. S.T.F. Dynamic Transfer Function Static Transfer Function Control Link Chain R + VCVS (Thevenin) N+ N- General form: EXXXXXXX N+ N- NC+ NC- STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> <TD <R>> - NC+ NC- DELAY D.T.F.S.T.F. Dynamic Transfer Function Static Transfer Function Control Link Chain R + VCVS (Thevenin) N+ N- General form: EXXXXXXX N+ N- NC+ NC- <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <TD <R>> This form is an extension of the syntax used in SPICE. N+ and N- are the positive and negative nodes, respectively. Positive current is assumed to flow from the positive node, through the source, to the negative node. NC+ and NC- are the positive and negative controlling nodes, respectively. The controlling signal is V(NC+) - V(NC-). Like the other voltage and current controlled elements, the Voltage-Controlled Voltage Sources can have two types of control
  • 118. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Controlled Sources DWS Chapter 4 4-4 link chain with different positions of the transfer functions. The static transfer function must be specified, while the dynamic transfer function is optional. The optional parameter TD is a delay time, expressed in seconds. The Delay operator is the first block of the control link chain and acts on the controlling signal. The minimum delay is corresponding to TSTEP (specified in the .TRAN statement) even if the input parameter TD is omitted or set to a value < TSTEP. This approximation can be considered when zero-delay control links are simulated. Regarding the delay discretization process, both ROUNDING and INTERPOLATION methods described in 1.2.5 are allowed depending on the DELAYMETH option set by the user on the DWS input file. The optional parameter R is the internal resistance (in ohms) and may be positive (1/GMAX  R  1/GMIN) or negative (-1/GMIN  R  -1/GMAX). If the parameter R is omitted or set to zero, the default value 1/GMAX will be assumed (see the .OPTIONS statement)..
  • 119. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Controlled Sources DWS Chapter 4 4-5 4.2 Voltage-Controlled Current Sources . - NC+ NC- DELAY D.T.F. S.T.F. Dynamic Transfer Function Static Transfer Function Control Link Chain VCCS (Norton) N+ N- R General form: GXXXXXXX N+ N- NC+ NC- STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> <TD <R>> - NC+ NC- DELAY D.T.F.S.T.F. Dynamic Transfer Function Static Transfer Function Control Link Chain VCCS (Norton) N+ N- R General form: GXXXXXXX N+ N- NC+ NC- <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <TD <R>> This form is an extension of the syntax used in SPICE. N+ and N- are the positive and negative nodes, respectively. Current flow is from the positive node, through the source, to the negative node. NC+ and NC- are the positive and negative controlling nodes, respectively. The controlling signal is V(NC+) - V(NC-). Like the other voltage and current controlled elements, the Voltage- Controlled Current Sources can have two types of control link chain with
  • 120. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Controlled Sources DWS Chapter 4 4-6 different positions of the transfer functions. The static transfer function must be specified, while the dynamic transfer function is optional. The optional parameter TD is a delay time expressed in seconds. The Delay operator is the first block of the control link chain and acts on the controlling signal. The minimum delay is corresponding to TSTEP (specified in the .TRAN statement) even if the input parameter TD is omitted or set to a value < TSTEP. This approximation can be considered when zero-delay control links are simulated. Regarding the delay discretization process, both ROUNDING and INTERPOLATION methods described in 1.2.5 are allowed depending on the DELAYMETH option set by the user on the DWS input file. The optional parameter R is the internal resistance (in ohms) and may be positive (1/GMAX  R  1/GMIN) or negative (-1/GMIN  R  -1/GMAX). If the parameter R is omitted or set to zero, the default value 1/GMIN will be assumed (see the .OPTIONS statement).
  • 121. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Controlled Sources DWS Chapter 4 4-7 4.3 Current-Controlled Voltage Sources . DELAY D.T.F. S.T.F. Dynamic Transfer Function Static Transfer Function Control Link Chain R + CCVS (Thevenin) N+ N- N I ELEM C General form: HXXXXXXX N+ N- I(ELEM,NC) STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> <TD <R>> DELAY D.T.F.S.T.F. Dynamic Transfer Function Static Transfer Function Control Link Chain R + CCVS (Thevenin) N+ N- N I ELEM C General form: HXXXXXXX N+ N- I(ELEM,NC) <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <TD <R>> This form is an extension of the syntax used in SPICE. N+ and N- are the positive and negative nodes, respectively. Positive current is assumed to flow from the positive node, through the source, to the negative node. The controlling current I(ELEM,NC) is the current which enters the port of the element ELEM connected to the node NC. Like the other voltage and current controlled elements, the Current-Controlled Voltage Sources can have two types of control
  • 122. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Controlled Sources DWS Chapter 4 4-8 link chain with different positions of the transfer functions. The static transfer function must be specified, while the dynamic transfer function is optional. The optional parameter TD is a delay time expressed in seconds. The Delay operator is the first block of the control link chain and acts on the controlling signal. The minimum delay is corresponding to TSTEP (specified in the .TRAN statement) even if the input parameter TD is omitted or set to a value < TSTEP. This approximation can be considered when zero-delay control links are simulated. Regarding the delay discretization process, both ROUNDING and INTERPOLATION methods described in 1.2.5 are allowed depending on the DELAYMETH option set by the user on the DWS input file. The optional parameter R is the internal resistance (in ohms) and may be positive (1/GMAX  R  1/GMIN) or negative (-1/GMIN  R  -1/GMAX). If the parameter R is omitted or set to zero, the default value 1/GMAX will be assumed (see the .OPTIONS statement).
  • 123. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Controlled Sources DWS Chapter 4 4-9 4.4 Current-Controlled Current Sources . DELAY D.T.F. S.T.F. Dynamic Transfer Function Static Transfer Function Control Link Chain N I ELEM R CCCS (Norton) N+ N- C General form: FXXXXXXX N+ N- I(ELEM,NC) STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> <TD <R>> DELAY D.T.F.S.T.F. Dynamic Transfer Function Static Transfer Function Control Link Chain N I ELEM R CCCS (Norton) N+ N- General form: FXXXXXXX N+ N- I(ELEM,NC) <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <TD <R>> This form is an extension of the syntax used in SPICE. N+ and N- are the positive and negative nodes, respectively. Current flow is from the positive node, through the source, to the negative node. The controlling current I(ELEM,NC) is the current which enters the port of the element ELEM connected to the node NC. Like the other voltage and current controlled elements, the Current-Controlled Current Sources can have two types of control link chain with different positions
  • 124. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Controlled Sources DWS Chapter 4 4-10 of the transfer functions. The static transfer function must be specified, while the dynamic transfer function is optional. The optional parameter TD is a delay time expressed in seconds. The Delay operator is the first block of the control link chain and acts on the controlling signal. The minimum delay is corresponding to TSTEP (specified in the .TRAN statement) even if the input parameter TD is omitted or set to a value < TSTEP. This approximation can be considered when zero-delay control links are simulated. Regarding the delay discretization process, both ROUNDING and INTERPOLATION methods described in 1.2.5 are allowed depending on the DELAYMETH option set by the user on the DWS input file. The optional parameter R is the internal resistance (in ohms) and may be positive (1/GMAX  R  1/GMIN) or negative (-1/GMIN  R  -1/GMAX). If the parameter R is omitted or set to zero, the default value 1/GMIN will be assumed (see the .OPTIONS statement).
  • 125. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Controlled Sources DWS Chapter 4 4-11 4.5 Multiplying Voltage-Controlled Voltage Sources . NC1 NC2 DELAY D.T.F. S.T.F. Dynamic Transfer Function Static Transfer Function Control Link Chain R + MVCVS (Thevenin) N+ N- +/- +/- General form: EXXXXXXX N+ N- <+->NC1 * <+->NC2 STATIC-TRANSFER- FUNCTION <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> <TD <R>> NC1 NC2 DELAY D.T.F.S.T.F. Dynamic Transfer Function Static Transfer Function Control Link Chain R + MVCVS (Thevenin) N+ N- +/- +/- General form: EXXXXXXX N+ N- <+->NC1 * <+->NC2 <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER- FUNCTION> STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <TD <R>> N+ and N- are the positive and negative nodes, respectively. Positive current is assumed to flow from the positive node, through the source, to the negative node.
  • 126. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Controlled Sources DWS Chapter 4 4-12 NC1 and NC2 are the two controlling nodes. The controlling signal is obtained multiplying the voltage waveforms at the nodes NC1 and NC2. The sign of these voltages is optional. Like the other voltage and current controlled elements, the Multiplying Voltage-Controlled Voltage Sources can have two types of control link chain with different positions of the transfer functions. The static transfer function must be specified, while the dynamic transfer function is optional. The optional parameter TD is a delay time expressed in seconds. The Delay operator is the first block of the control link chain and acts on the controlling signal. The minimum delay is corresponding to TSTEP (specified in the .TRAN statement) even if the input parameter TD is omitted or set to a value < TSTEP. This approximation can be considered when zero-delay control links are simulated. Regarding the delay discretization process, both ROUNDING and INTERPOLATION methods described in 1.2.5 are allowed depending on the DELAYMETH option set by the user on the DWS input file. The optional parameter R is the internal resistance (in ohms) and may be positive (1/GMAX  R  1/GMIN) or negative (-1/GMIN  R  -1/GMAX). If the parameter R is omitted or set to zero, the default value 1/GMAX will be assumed (see the .OPTIONS statement).
  • 127. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Controlled Sources DWS Chapter 4 4-13 4.6 Multiplying Voltage-ControlledCurrent Sources NC1 NC2 DELAY D.T.F. S.T.F. Dynamic Transfer Function Static Transfer Function Control Link Chain R MVCCS (Norton) N+ N- +/- +/- General form: GXXXXXXX N+ N- <+->NC1 * <+->NC2 STATIC-TRANSFER- FUNCTION <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION> <TD <R>> NC1 NC2 DELAY D.T.F.S.T.F. Dynamic Transfer Function Static Transfer Function Control Link Chain R MVCCS (Norton) N+ N- +/- +/- General form: GXXXXXXX N+ N- <+->NC1 * <+->NC2 <DYNAMIC-TRANSFER- FUNCTION> STATIC-TRANSFER-FUNCTION <TD <R>> N+ and N- are the positive and negative nodes, respectively. Current flow is from the positive node, through the source, to the negative node. NC1 and NC2 are the
  • 128. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Controlled Sources DWS Chapter 4 4-14 two controlling nodes. The controlling signal is obtained multiplying the voltage waveforms at the nodes NC1 and NC2. The sign of these voltages is optional. Like the other voltage and current controlled elements, the Multiplying Voltage- Controlled Current Sources can have two types of control link chain with different positions of the transfer functions. The static transfer function must be specified, while the dynamic transfer function is optional. The optional parameter TD is a delay time expressed in seconds. The Delay operator is the first block of the control link chain and acts on the controlling signal. The minimum delay is corresponding to TSTEP (specified in the .TRAN statement) even if the input parameter TD is omitted or set to a value < TSTEP. This approximation can be considered when zero-delay control links are simulated. Regarding the delay discretization process, both ROUNDING and INTERPOLATION methods described in 1.2.5 are allowed depending on the DELAYMETH option set by the user on the DWS input file. The optional parameter R is the internal resistance (in ohms) and may be positive (1/GMAX  R  1/GMIN) or negative (-1/GMIN  R  -1/GMAX). If the parameter R is omitted or set to zero, the default value 1/GMIN will be assumed (see the .OPTIONS statement).
  • 129. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Controlled Sources DWS Chapter 4 4-15 4.7 Static Transfer Functions . The input signal of the static transfer function (controlling signal) is a voltage, expressed in Volts, for Voltage-Controlled Sources, a current, expressed in Amps, for Current-Controlled Sources or it is a square voltage, expressed in square Volts, for Multiplying Voltage-Controlled Sources. The output signal of the static transfer function (unloaded source output waveform) is a voltage, expressed in Volts, for Voltage Sources, while it is a current, expressed in Amps, for Current Sources. Five static transfer functions are available: Linear, Piece-Wise Linear, File, Threshold and Hysteresis. 4.7.1 Linear Static Transfer Function . Syntax: value V (V) I (A) V*V(V )2 V (V) I (A) Examples: E1 2 3 14 1 2.0 H1 4 0 I(RS,15) 0.5K In Voltage-Controlled Voltage Sources value is the voltage gain. In Voltage-Controlled Current Sources value is the transconductance in mhos. In Current-Controlled Voltage Sources value is the transresistance in ohms. In Current-Controlled Current Sources value is the current gain. In Multiplying Voltage-Controlled Voltage Sources value is the gain in 1/Volts. In Multiplying Voltage-Controlled Current Sources value is the gain in Amps/(square Volt).
  • 130. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Controlled Sources DWS Chapter 4 4-16 4.7.2 Piece-Wise Linear Static Transfer Function . Syntax: PWL( X1 Y1 X2 Y2 <X3 Y3 <X4 Y4 ... <X199 Y199 <X200 Y200>>>> ) X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 V (V) I (A) V*V(V )2 V (V) I (A) Examples: E1 4 0 10 20 PWL( -1 1 -.0001 1 .0001 -1 1 -1 ) H1 4 0 I(RS,15) PWL( -1 1 -.0001 1 .0001 -1 1 -1 ) This function implements a Piece-Wise Linear (PWL) behavior containing up to 200 breakpoints. Each breakpoint is defined by a pair of values (Xi,Yi). Each pair of values (Xi, Yi) specifies that the value of the source is Yi (in Volts or Amps) at controlling signal = Xi. The number of pairs (n) must be 2n200. The value of the source at intermediate values of controlling signal is determined by using linear interpolation on the input values. For controlling signal < X1 the static transfer function keeps the slope related to the first interval X1 X2, for controlling signal > Xn the static transfer function keeps the slope related to the last interval Xn-1 Xn. The pairs must be written in order of increasing controlling signal values (Xi  Xi+1) otherwise an error message is issued.
  • 131. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Controlled Sources DWS Chapter 4 4-17 4.7.3 File Static Transfer Function . Syntax: FILE( filename ) Y1 Y0 0 Y2 Y3 Yn X 2X 3X nX V (V) I (A) V*V(V )2 V (V) I (A) Example: E1 4 0 10 20 FILE( stfsamples ) H1 4 0 I(RS,15) FILE( stfsamples ) This function implements a static transfer behavior described by a DWS-format file identified by the parameter filename. In this file the sampling time-step value is assumed as the independent variable step. The value of the source at intermediate values of controlling signal is determined by using linear interpolation. For controlling signal < controlling signal of the first sample the static transfer function keeps the slope related to the interval between the first two samples, for controlling signal > controlling signal of the last sample the static transfer function keeps the slope related to the interval between the last two samples. File name must begin with a letter. Strings beginning with 'DC' or 'dc' are invalid file names since these strings are interpreted as the DC parameter of an independent source.
  • 132. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Controlled Sources DWS Chapter 4 4-18 4.7.4 Threshold Static Transfer Function . Syntax: THR( XT Y1 Y2 ) Y2 Y1 XT V (V) I (A) V*V(V )2 V (V) I (A) Examples: E1 4 0 10 20 THR( 10 1 2 ) 1NS 50 H1 4 0 I(RS,15) THR( 10MA 1 2 ) 1NS This function implements a static transfer behavior described by an ideal threshold. The parameter XT is the input threshold (in Volts, Amps or square Volts). For controlling signal < XT the source assumes the value Y1 (in Volts or Amps), while for controlling signal  XT the source assumes the value Y2 (in Volts or Amps).
  • 133. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Controlled Sources DWS Chapter 4 4-19 4.7.5 Hysteresis Static Transfer Function . Syntax: HYST( XT1 XT2 Y1 Y2 ) Y2 Y1 XT2XT1 V (V) I (A) V*V(V )2 V (V) I (A) Examples: E1 4 0 10 20 HYST( 0 10 1 2 ) 1NS H1 4 0 I(RS,15) HYST( 0 10MA 1 2 ) 1NS 100 This function implements a static transfer behavior described by an ideal hysteresis cycle. The parameters XT1 and XT2 are the input thresholds (in Volts, Amps or square Volts). For controlling signal < XT1 the source assumes the value Y1 (in Volts or Amps), while for controlling signal > XT2 the source assumes the value Y2 (in Volts or Amps). In the interval between XT1 and XT2 the source assumes the value Y1 if the controlling signal is increasing from values < XT1 to values > XT1, while the source assumes the value Y2 if the controlling signal is decreasing from values > XT2 to values < XT2.
  • 134. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Controlled Sources DWS Chapter 4 4-20 4.8 Dynamic Transfer Functions for Voltage or Current-Controlled Sources . The dynamic transfer function is a linear, time-invariant transformation that can be performed in the control link chain after the delay operator and before the static function. Its behavior can be described in three different ways: - In time-domain by means of its unit-step response s(t). This can implement the so called BTM (Behavioral Time Modeling) technique to obtain models directly in time-domain. - In the s-plane by means of its transfer response H(s) defined with poles and zeros in the complex frequency domain (s-plane). - In the z-plane by means of its transfer response H(z) defined with poles and zeros in the digital complex frequency domain (z-plane). DWS transforms any of these description forms into discretized time transfer functions with a time step corresponding to that chosen by the user for the simulation (TSTEP).
  • 135. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Controlled Sources DWS Chapter 4 4-21 4.8.1 Unit-step Dynamic Response .. The time-domain unit-step response can be described in the two DWS standard ways: Piece-Wise Linear or File. - Piece-Wise Linear Syntax: s(t) = PWL( X1 Y1 X2 Y2 <X3 Y3 <X4 Y4 ... <X199 Y199 <X200 Y200>>>> ) X1 X2 X4 X5 X6 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 t s(t) Y1 X3 Examples: EEX 4 0 10 20 1 s(t)=PWL( 0 .25 1US .5 3US 1 ) HEY 4 0 I(R2,10) THR( 10MA ) s(t)=PWL( 0 .25 1US .5 3US 1 ) In this case the behavior of unit-step response s(t) is given by a PieceWise Linear behavior containing up to 200 breakpoints. The pairs of values XiYi are the breakpoint coordinates. Each pair specifies that the value of s(t) is Yi at time = Xi expressed in seconds. The number of pairs (n) must be 2n200. The value of s(t) at intermediate time values is determined by using linear interpolation on the input values. For time < X1 it is assumed that s(t)=0. For time > Xn it is assumed that s(t)=Yn. The pairs must be written in order of increasing time values (Xi < Xi+1). Use note: As far as possible it is convenient to perform the BTM (Behavioral Time Modeling) using the PWL fitting of dynamic behaviors because it is the fastest approach in terms of simulation time. Simulation time is directly proportional to the number of breakpoints n and inversely proportional to the simulation time
  • 136. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Controlled Sources DWS Chapter 4 4-22 step TSTEP. A further advantage (about a factor 2) in simulation speed can be achieved if the values of time coordinates Xi are chosen as integer multiples of TSTEP. - File Syntax: s(t) = FILE( filename ) t s(t) Extracted pure delay T TSTEP file samples sampled values Examples: EEY 4 0 10 20 1 s(t) = FILE( srsamples ) HEX 4 0 I(R2,10) 1 s(t) = FILE( srsamples ) In this case the behavior of unit-step response is given by its n samples s(kT), 0kn-1, at fixed step (T) contained in the DWS-format file identified by the parameter filename. File name must begin with a letter. Strings beginning with 'DC' or 'dc' are invalid file names since these strings are interpreted as the DC parameter of an independent source. The value of s(t) after the last sample contained in the file is assumed to hold the value of the last sample. During the simulation loop, DWS performs a time- convolution process involving coefficients obtained sampling the file contents at simulation time step (TSTEP). If TSTEP is not coincident with the file time step T, these coefficients will be calculated by means of linear interpolation between file samples. User note:
  • 137. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Controlled Sources DWS Chapter 4 4-23 The file representation of dynamic behavior is the most direct and accurate way to perform BTM, because DWS outputs coming from simulation or time-domain measure can be utilized without processing. Nevertheless its use can become more time-consuming than PWL due to time-convolution, that causes a quadratic growth of simulation time versus the inverse of simulation time step (1/TSTEP). Therefore, whenever possible, it is advisable to choose piece-wise-linear step response descriptions, which guarantee linear growth of simulation time versus sampling frequency. In case the file description is utilized for accuracy reasons despite its computing requirement, it is suggested to extract the possible pure delay component of s(t) and place it into the delay operator provided in the control link chain, in order to limit the number of convolution coefficients as far as possible.
  • 138. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Controlled Sources DWS Chapter 4 4-24 4.8.2 S-plane Dynamic Transfer Function .. Syntax: H(s) = ZEROS( Rez1 Imz1 ... Rezm Imzm ) POLES( Rep1 Imp1 ... Repn Impn ) H0=value Examples: EEHS 4 0 10 20 1 H(s) = ZEROS( 0 1 ) POLES( -50K 0 -1K 25MEG ) H0=5 HEHS 4 0 I(R2,10) 1 H(s) = ZEROS( 0 1 ) POLES( -50K 0 -1K 25MEG ) H0=5 The behavior of the dynamic response is described in the complex frequency plane (s) through its pole/zero representation expressed in the following general form: H(s) = K (s-s ) ... (s-s )(s-s )(s-s ) ... (s-s )(s-s ) (s-s ) ... (s-s )(s-s )(s-s ) ... (s-s )(s-s ) z1 zr z,r+1 z,r+1 * zm zm * p1 pq p,q+1 p,q+1* pn pn * where: szi = Rezi is the generic real zero, szi = Rezi + jImzi and szi* = Rezi - jImzi are the generic couple of complex conjugate zeros, spi = Repi is the generic real pole, spi = Repi + jImpi and spi* = Repi - jImpi are the generic couple of complex conjugate poles j  Re ,Im Re ,-Im Re ,Im Re ,-Im Re ,0 Re ,0 pi zi pi pi pi pi zi zi zi zi real zero real pole complex conjugate zeros complex conjugate poles
  • 139. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Controlled Sources DWS Chapter 4 4-25 The zeros (poles) in the s-plane are defined by a maximum of 10 pairs of values. No particular ordering of these values is required. Every pair (Rei,Imi) represents either a real root (in which case Imi=0 and Rei is the root value expressed in 1/second) or a pair of complex roots Rei+jImi, Rei-jImi (Rei expressed in 1/second and Imi expressed in radians/second). For stable systems all poles must lie in the left half-plane ( < 0) so that Repi < 0. H0 is the steady state value of the dynamic transfer function. More precisely, if k is the number of zeros in the origin, H(s)=H'(s)*sk with H'(0) not null neither infinite, then: = H'(0) = K (-s ) ...(-s )|-s | ... |-s | (-s ) ...(-s )|-s | ... |-s | z1 z,r+1-k z,m-k p1 pq p,q+1 pn z,r-k 2 2 2 2 H0 As any H(s) transfer function is subject to a bilinear transformation with sampling period T equal to the time step chosen for simulation TSTEP, the frequency response of the filter actually simulated by DWS is a warped version of that described by H(s), according to the nonlinear frequency transformation  = 2/T * tan(T/2) where  is the frequency (in radians/second) of the actually simulated filter and  is the corresponding frequency of the filter with H(s) response. This nonlinear relationship is to be taken into account whenever an H(s) description is used. When working with small simulation time step (TSTEP), some well known numerical troubles can arise due to rounding errors of signals and coefficients. Before starting the simulation, DWS automatically evaluates this possibility and, if potential troubles are detected, a specific warning message will be issued at standard output.
  • 140. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Controlled Sources DWS Chapter 4 4-26 4.8.3 Z-plane Dynamic Transfer Function . Syntax: H(z) = ZEROS( Rez1 Imz1 ... Rezm Imzm ) POLES( Rep1 Imp1 ... Repn Impn ) H0=value T=value Examples: EEHZ 4 0 10 20 1 H(z) = ZEROS( 0 1 ) POLES( 50M 0 ) H0=5 T=1US HEHZ 4 0 I(R2,10) 1 H(z) = ZEROS( 0 1 ) POLES( 50M 0 ) H0=5 T=1MS The behavior of the dynamic response is described in the digital complex plane z through its pole/zero representation expressed in the general form: H(z) = K (z-z ) ... (z-z )(z-z )(z-z ) ... (z-z )(z-z ) (z-z ) ... (z-z )(z-z )(z-z ) ... (z-z )(z-z ) z1 zr z,r+1 z,r+1 * zm zm * p1 pq p,q+1 p,q+1 * pn pn * where: zzi = Rezi is the generic real zero, zzi = Rezi + jImzi and zzi* = Rezi - jImzi are the generic couple of complex conjugate zeros, zpi = Repi is the generic real pole, zpi = Repi + jImpi and zpi* = Repi - jImpi are the generic couple of complex conjugate poles Re ,0zi Re ,-Impi pi Re ,0pi Re ,Impi pi Re ,Imzi zi Re ,-Imzi zi real zero real pole complex conjugate complex conjugate zeros poles z = -1 ( = ) z = 1  ( = 0 ) Im[z] Re[z]
  • 141. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Controlled Sources DWS Chapter 4 4-27 The zeros (poles) in the z-plane are defined by a maximum of 10 pairs of values. No particular ordering of these values is required. Every pair (Rei,Imi) represents either a real root (in which case Imi=0 and Rei is the root value) or a pair of complex roots Rei+jImi, Rei-jImi. For stable systems all zeros and poles must lie within the unit circle. H0 is the zero frequency value (z=1) of the dynamic transfer function. More precisely, if k is the number of zeros for z=1, H(z)=H'(z)*(z-1)k with H'(1) not null neither infinite, then H0=H'(1). T is the sampling period (in seconds) that has been used to time discretize the dynamic transfer function.
  • 143. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino S-Parameter Elements DWS Chapter 5 5-1 Chapter 5 S - P a r a m e t e r E l e m e n t s . 5. 5 5.1 Introduction to S-Parameter Elements 5.2 1-Port Elements Defined by S-Parameters 5.3 2-Port Elements Defined by S-Parameters 5.4 3-Port Elements Defined by S-Parameters 5.5 4-Port Elements Defined by S-Parameters 5.6 S-Parameter Description 5.6.1 Piece-Wise Linear S-Parameter Description 5.6.2 File S-Parameter Description
  • 144. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino S-Parameter Elements DWS Chapter 5 5-2 5.1 Introduction to S-Parameter Elements The electrical behavior of a k-port circuit element can be completely described by the kxk matrix (Sij) of its scattering parameters (S-parameters), after having defined a reference impedance at each port. S-parameters are usually expressed either in the complex frequency plane (Sij(s)) or in the time domain (Sij(t)). In the complex frequency plane, each S-parameter is defined via the equation Sij=bi/aj where bi is the reflected wave at port i and aj is the incident wave at port j when all ports are terminated on the reference impedance (ak=0 for kj). Z0 Z0 Z0 Z0 Z0 1 2 i j n a ib j CIRCUIT BLOCK DWS offers the possibility to describe circuit blocks by means of their scattering parameters. This extends the capability of BTM (Behavioral Time Modeling), because each S-parameter can be defined by its time-behavior when the input port is stimulated by a unit-step wave. This also corresponds to the measurement of TDR (Time Domain Reflection) or TDT (Time Domain Transmission) waves, so that a direct link can be established with wideband instrumentation for accurate modeling of physical devices. S-parameter time-behaviors are described in the standard DWS formats including FILE , where the waveform is carried by a standard DWS output file, and PWL when the waveform can be fitted by means of a piece-wise linear behavior.
  • 145. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino S-Parameter Elements DWS Chapter 5 5-3 User note. To avoid troubles in defining port reference impedance, DWS implements the S- parameter elements adding at each port a "short" transmission line of impedance Z0 and with a delay corresponding to TSTEP/2. Z0 Intrinsic block TD=TSTEP/2 N1 N2 N3 N4 N4' N3' N2' N1' DWS implementation of n-port block described by its S-parameters. In order to minimize the delay error in signal transmission through ports, the delay of transmission S-parameters is automatically decreased of TSTEP.
  • 146. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino S-Parameter Elements DWS Chapter 5 5-4 5.2 1-Port Elements Defined by S-Parameters Z0 S11 a b port N N 1-port General form: BXXXXXXX N 0 S11=sdesc N and ground are the nodes defining the element port. Positive current is assumed to flow from N to ground. sdesc is the S-parameter description (see 5.6).
  • 147. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino S-Parameter Elements DWS Chapter 5 5-5 5.3 2-Port Elements Defined by S-Parameters Z01 a1 b1 port N1 S11 Z02 b2 a2 port N2S22 S21 S12 N1 N2 2-port General form: BXXXXXXX N1 0 N2 0 S11=sdesc S21=sdesc S12=sdesc S22=sdesc N1 and ground are the nodes at port 1; N2 and ground are the nodes at port 2. Positive current is assumed to flow from N1 to ground and from N2 to ground. sdesc is the S-parameter description (see 5.6). Reference impedance at the two ports must be the same. If the element is reciprocal, i.e. S12=S21, the general form is: BXXXXXXX N1 0 N2 0 S11=sdesc S21=sdesc S22=sdesc If the element is symmetrical, i.e. S22=S11 and S12=S21, the general form is: BXXXXXXX N1 0 N2 0 S11=sdesc S21=sdesc
  • 148. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino S-Parameter Elements DWS Chapter 5 5-6 5.4 3-Port Elements Defined by S-Parameters N1 N2 3-port N3 General form: BXXXXXXX N1 0 N2 0 N3 0 S11=sdesc S21=sdesc S31=sdesc S12=sdesc S22=sdesc S32=sdesc S13=sdesc S23=sdesc S33=sdesc N1 and ground are the nodes at port 1; N2 and ground are the nodes at port 2. N3 and ground are the nodes at port 3. Positive current is assumed to flow from N1 to ground, from N2 to ground and from N3 to ground. sdesc is the S-parameter description (see 5.6). Reference impedance at the three ports must be the same. If the element is reciprocal, i.e. S12=S21, S13=S31 and S23=S32, the general form is: BXXXXXXX N1 0 N2 0 N3 0 S11=sdesc S21=sdesc S31=sdesc S22=sdesc S32=sdesc S33=sdesc
  • 149. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino S-Parameter Elements DWS Chapter 5 5-7 5.5 4-Port Elements Defined by S-Parameters N1 N2 4-port N3 N4 General form: BXXXXXXX N1 0 N2 0 N3 0 N4 0 S11=sdesc S21=sdesc S31=sdesc S41=sdesc S12=sdesc S22=sdesc S32=sdesc S42=sdesc S13=sdesc S23=sdesc S33=sdesc S43=sdesc S14=sdesc S24=sdesc S34=sdesc S44=sdesc N1 and ground are the nodes at port 1; N2 and ground are the nodes at port 2. N3 and ground are the nodes at port 3; N4 and ground are the nodes at port 4. Positive current is assumed to flow from N1 to ground, from N2 to ground, from N3 to ground and from N4 to ground. sdesc is the S-parameter description (see 5.6). Reference impedance at the four ports must be the same. If the element is reciprocal, i.e. S12=S21, S13=S31, S23=S32, S14=S41, S24=S42 and S34=S43, the general form is: BXXXXXXX N1 0 N2 0 N3 0 N4 0 S11=sdesc S21=sdesc S31=sdesc S41=sdesc S22=sdesc S32=sdesc S42=sdesc S33=sdesc S43=sdesc S44=sdesc If the element is symmetrical, i.e. S11=S22=S33=S44, S21=S12=S43=S34, S31=S42=S13=S24 and S41=S32=S23=S14, the general form is: BXXXXXXX N1 0 N2 0 N3 0 N4 0 S11=sdesc S21=sdesc S31=sdesc S41=sdesc
  • 150. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino S-Parameter Elements DWS Chapter 5 5-8 5.6 S-Parameter Description . DWS allows the user to describe S-parameters in the time domain (sdesc=Sij(t)). Sij(t) can be given in the two DWS standard ways: Piece-Wise Linear or File. 5.6.1 Piece-Wise Linear S-Parameter Description Syntax: PWL( X1 Y1 X2 Y2 <X3 Y3 <X4 Y4 ... <X199 Y199 <X200 Y200>>>> ) <Z0=value> <TD=value> Example: B1 4 0 S11=PWL( 0 0 .1NS .1 .5NS .32 1.5NS .76 3NS 1 ) Z0=50 The optional parameters have the following meaning: parameters default values units Z0 (reference impedance of port) 50 ohms TD (pure delay of S-parameter response) TSTEP seconds In this case the S-parameter description is given by a Piece-Wise Linear behavior containing up to 200 breakpoints. The pairs of values Xk,Yk are the breakpoint coordinates. Each pair specifies that the value of Sij(t) is Yk at time = Xk+TD expressed in seconds. The number of pairs (n) must be 2n200. The value of Sij(t) at intermediate time values is determined by using linear interpolation. For time < X1+TD it is assumed that Sij(t)=0. For time > Xn+TD it is assumed that Sij(t)=Yn. The pairs must be written in order of increasing time values (Xk < Xk+1). If this condition is not satisfied (i.e. the response has an infinite slope point), a fatal error occurs. Actually, the optional parameter TD enables the user to express a pure delay time between the incident wave at a port and the start of
  • 151. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino S-Parameter Elements DWS Chapter 5 5-9 the reflected wave at the same port (Sii parameters) or of the transmitted wave at the other ports (Sij parameters). TD will be dealt with in two different modes according to the DELAYMETH option statement as shown in 1.2.5. If TD is omitted or set to a value < TSTEP, the discretized delay will be equal to TSTEP. As default TD will be rounded to the closest integer multiple of TSTEP. User note. As far as possible it is advisable to perform the BTM (Behavioral Time Modeling) using the pwl fitting of S-parameters because it is the fastest approach in terms of simulation time. Simulation time is directly proportional to the number n of breakpoints and inversely proportional to simulation time step TSTEP. A further gain (about 2) in simulation speed can be achieved if the values of time-coordinates Xk are chosen as integer multiples of TSTEP.
  • 152. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino S-Parameter Elements DWS Chapter 5 5-10 5.6.2 File S-Parameter Description Syntax: FILE( filename ) Example: B1 4 0 S11=FILE( s11.samples ) In this case the behavior of S-parameter is given by its n samples Sij(kT+TD), 0kn-1, at fixed step (T) contained in the DWS-format file identified by the parameter filename. File name must begin with a letter. Strings beginning with 'DC' or 'dc' are invalid file names since these strings are interpreted as the DC parameter of an independent source. This file has an additional line, with the following syntax, after the S-parameter samples: Z0=value TD=value The parameters have the following meaning: parameters default values units Z0 (reference impedance of port) no default ohms TD (pure delay of S-parameter response) no default seconds The first sample in the file is the value of Sij(TD). The value of Sij(t) for t < TD is assumed to be 0. The value of Sij(t) for t > TD + nT is assumed to hold the value of the last sample. Actually, the parameter TD enables the user to express a pure delay time between the incident wave at a port and the start of the reflected wave at the same port (Sii parameters) or of the transmitted wave at the other ports (Sij parameters).
  • 153. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino S-Parameter Elements DWS Chapter 5 5-11 TD will be dealt with in two different modes according to the DELAYMETH option statement as shown in 1.2.5. If TD is set to a value < TSTEP, the discretized delay will be equal to TSTEP. As default TD will be rounded to the closest integer multiple of TSTEP. Optional comments are allowed after the line containing the Z0 and TD values. Each comment line must have an asterisk "*" as first character of the line. During the simulation loop, DWS performs a time-convolution process involving coefficients obtained sampling the file contents with simulation time step (TSTEP). If TSTEP is not coincident with the file time step (T), these coefficients will be calculated by means of linear interpolation between file samples. User note: The file representation of S-parameters is the most direct and accurate way to perform BTM, because DWS outputs coming from simulation or time-domain measure can be utilized without processing. Nevertheless its use can become more time-consuming than pwl due to time-convolution, that causes a quadratic growth of simulation time versus the inverse of simulation time step (1/TSTEP). Therefore, whenever possible, it is advisable to choose piece-wise-linear descriptions, which guarantee linear growth of simulation time versus sampling frequency. In case the file description is utilized for accuracy reasons despite its computing requirements, it is better to extract the possible pure delay component of Sij(t) and add it to the value of the parameter TD, in order to limit the number of convolution coefficients as far as possible.
  • 155. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Adaptors DWS Chapter 6 6-1 Chapter 6 A d a p t o r s 6. 6 6.1 General Features 6.2 Series Adaptors 6.3 Bimodal Adaptors 6.4 Multimodal Adaptors
  • 156. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Adaptors DWS Chapter 6 6-2 6.1 General Features DWS supports a particular class of multiport elements called adaptors that can operate useful transformations among port voltages and currents. Adaptors can be utilized to extend the application range of other DWS elements. Three-port series adaptors [1] can be utilized to convert a one-port in a two-port element placed "in series" to a net branch (see also 1.2.3). Modal adaptors convert variables at physical ports in variables belonging the so called "modal-domain" and can be utilized to model lossless and lossy multiconductor transmission lines in a simple way. [1] A.Fettweis, K.Meerkötter: "On adaptors for wave digital filters", IEEE trans. on Acoustics, Speech and Signal Processing, vol. ASSP-23, pp.516-525, Dec. 1975.
  • 157. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Adaptors DWS Chapter 6 6-3 6.2 Series Adaptors I1 N1 I2 I3 N3 N2 General form: ASXXXXXX N1 N2 N3 Examples: AS1 10 20 30 ASRES 5 12 20 N1, N2 and N3 are the port identifiers (nodes). A series adaptor is defined by the following equalities: V3 = V1 - V2 I3 = -I1 = I2 A one-port element connected to the N3 node of a series adaptor is converted in a two-port element connected between the N1 and N2 nodes. For example, the two statements: AS 1 2 3 R 3 0 10K are equivalent to the following statement: R 1 2 10K
  • 158. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Adaptors DWS Chapter 6 6-4 A lumped network, or an actual device modeled with BTM technique by means of a one-port scattering element, can be placed in series to a branch by means of a series adaptor, as shown in the following example: B1PORT B1PORT N N1 N2 B1PORTN1 N2 ASB Series connection of one-port element defined by scattering parameters.
  • 159. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Adaptors DWS Chapter 6 6-5 6.3 Bimodal Adaptors Bimodal adaptors convert voltage and current variables at their two "physical ports" into variables at two modal ports called even (or common) mode port and odd (or differential) mode port. N2 NO odd-mode port N1 NE even-mode port Physical domain Two-mode domain I1 I2 V2 V1 IE IO VE VO General form: AMXXXXXX N1 N2 NE NO AMXXXXXX N1 N2 NE NO Z0=value AMXXXXXX N1 N2 NE NO C=value AMXXXXXX N1 N2 NE NO L=value Examples: AM1 10 20 30 40 AMLINE 5 12 20 70 N1 and N2 are the physical port identifiers. NE and NO are even (common) and odd (differential) modal port identifiers, respectively. The following transformation, not depending on port impedance, is performed between port variables VE +V V1 2 2 = VO -V V1 2 2 = IE = +I I1 2 2 - IO = -I I1 2 2 -
  • 160. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Adaptors DWS Chapter 6 6-6 If the optional parameters Z0, C or L are not given, the reference impedance at the ports will be automatically set by the circuit elements connected to the Bimodal Adaptor. If, due to network topology, the port reference impedance cannot be defined, one of the three optional parameters must be specified. In this way an additional transmission line with a delay of TSTEP/2, connected at the intrinsic Bimodal Adaptor, decouples it from the other elements of the network. The characteristic impedance of this line may be expressed in one of three forms: directly as impedance Z0 (ohm), as capacitance C (Farads), so Z0 is set to TSTEP/(2*C), or as inductance L (Henries), so Z0 is set to 2*L/TSTEP. Bimodal adaptors can model symmetrical two-conductor coupled transmission lines by means of a pair of uncoupled lines (lossless or lossy) representing even and odd mode propagation. For example, a two-conductor coupled transmission lines can be described to DWS in the following way: AM1 1 2 10 20 TLE 10 30 Z0=80 TD=1.01NS TLO 20 40 Z0=50 TD=1NS AM2 3 4 30 40 AM1 AM2 TLE/BLE TLO/BLO 1 2 3 4 TLE and TLO can be replaced by two-port scattering elements to model losses in a behavioral way, so that direct utilization of odd and even TDR/TDT measures is possible. When modal propagation velocities are slightly different as usually happens for non homogeneous dielectric, the use of INTERPOLATION delay discretization method is recommended (see also 1.2.5).
  • 161. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Adaptors DWS Chapter 6 6-7 6.4 Multimodal Adaptors Multimodal adaptors convert voltage and current variables at their "physical ports" into variables at their "modal ports". The number of physical ports may vary in the range from 2 to 100. The number of modal ports equals the number of physical ports. Npn Nmn Np1 Nm1 Physical domain n-mode domain I1 V1 J1 E1 Np2 Nm2 I2 V2 J2 E2 In Vn Jn En General form: AMXXXXXX Np1 ... Npn Nm1 ... Nmn MNAME AMXXXXXX Np1 ... Npn Nm1 ... Nmn MNAME Z0=value AMXXXXXX Np1 ... Npn Nm1 ... Nmn MNAME C=value AMXXXXXX Np1 ... Npn Nm1 ... Nmn MNAME L=value Examples: AMPM 10 20 30 110 120 130 MOD1 AMMP 40 50 60 140 150 160 MOD1 The Multimodal Adaptor statement must reference a particular multimodal adaptor model, described in a .MODEL statement. Np1 ... Npn are the physical port identifiers. Nm1 ... Nmn are the modal port identifiers.
  • 162. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Adaptors DWS Chapter 6 6-8 MNAME is the model name. Model name must begin with a letter. Strings beginning with 'DC' or 'dc' are invalid model names since these strings are interpreted as the DC parameter of an independent source. If the optional parameters Z0, C or L are not given, the reference impedance at the ports will be automatically set by the circuit elements connected to the Multimodal Adaptor. If, due to network topology, the port reference impedance cannot be defined, one of the three optional parameters must be specified. In this way an additional transmission line with a delay of TSTEP/2, connected at the intrinsic Multimodal Adaptor, decouples it from the other elements of the network. The characteristic impedance of this line may be expressed in one of three forms: directly as impedance Z0 (ohm), as capacitance C (Farads), so Z0 is set to TSTEP/(2*C), or as inductance L (Henries), so Z0 is set to 2*L/TSTEP. - Multimodal Adaptor Parameters in .MODEL Statement The multimodal adaptor parameters are specified in a .MODEL statement. This statement may take one of the two following forms: 1) .MODEL MNAME AM n ROW=(v11 ... vn1) ... ROW=(v1n ... vnn) where: MNAME is the model name; AM is the keyword specifying that the .MODEL statement refers to multimodal adaptors; n is the number of physical ports; vij represents the i,j element of the nxn voltage eigenvector matrix defining the voltage transformation. 2) .MODEL MNAME AM FILE( filename ) where filename is the name of an ASCII file containing the voltage eigenvector matrix. File name must begin with a letter. Strings beginning with 'DC' or 'dc' are invalid file names since these strings are interpreted as the DC parameter of an independent source. The general form of the file is the following:
  • 163. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Adaptors DWS Chapter 6 6-9 n v11 ... vn1 ... ... v1n ... vnn * comments The following transformation, not depending on port impedance, is performed between voltages and currents at the physical and modal ports: V = T E I = (T ) Jv t -1 v where: v = ( vi ) is the vertical vector of physical port voltages; E = ( Ei ) is the vertical vector of modal port voltages; Tv = (vij) is the nxn voltage eigenvector matrix; I = (Ii ) is the vertical vector of physical port currents; J = (Ji) is the vertical vector of modal port currents. Note also that equals the current eigenvector matrix. Multimodal Adaptors are used to model n-conductor transmission lines in nonhomogeneous dielectrics by means of n uncoupled lines (lossless or lossy) representing different propagation modes. For example, 3-conductor coupled transmission lines can be described to DWS in the following way: AM1 1 2 3 10 20 30 LINES_MOD TL1 10 40 Z0=32.6 TD=1.945NS TL2 20 50 Z0=26.9 TD=1.731NS TL3 30 60 Z0=5.0 TD=1.664NS AM2 4 5 6 40 50 60 LINES_MOD .MODEL LINES_MOD AM 3 ROW=( 1.0 1.0 1.0 ) ROW=( 1.07 0.0 + -2.22 ) ROW=( 1.0 -1.0 1.0 ) )v t -1 T(
  • 164. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Adaptors DWS Chapter 6 6-10 TL3 3 TL2 2 AM1 AM2 TL1 1 4 5 6 10 20 30 40 50 60
  • 165. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Simulation Control Statements DWS Chapter 8 7-1 Chapter 7 S u b c i r c u i t s a n d C h a i n s 7. 7 7.1 General Features 7.2 Subcircuits 7.2.1 .SUBCKT Statement 7.2.2 .ENDS Statement 7.2.3 Subcircuit Calls 7.3 Chains of Cells 7.3.1 .CELL Statement 7.3.2 .ENDC Statement 7.3.3 Cell Calls
  • 166. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Simulation Control Statements DWS Chapter 8 7-2 7.1 General Features DWS includes some facilities to speed up writing out netlists when repetitive blocks are included within the network. Hierarchical circuit description is allowed by subcircuits that operate exactly like their SPICE counterparts. Subcircuits are a practical method to build up libraries that can be easily included and used in DWS input files. In addition, a further utility is included to deal efficiently with the description of iterative network structures composed by several identical cells connected together in chain configurations. This chain expansion feature is very useful, for example to model transmission lines of any length, starting from a basic unit- length cell described at circuital or behavioral level. Subcircuits and cells are independent block-definition methods and their only use limitation is that they cannot be nested together.
  • 167. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Simulation Control Statements DWS Chapter 8 7-3 7.2 Subcircuits SUBCKT N1 N2 N3 Nn A network block that consists of DWS elements can be defined and referenced as subcircuit. The subcircuit is defined by a grouping of element statements; the program then automatically inserts the group of elements wherever the subcircuit is referenced. There is no limit on the size or complexity of subcircuits, and subcircuits may contain other subcircuits without any practical limit of nesting level. 7.2.1 .SUBCKT Statement General form: .SUBCKT SUBNAM N1 <N2 N3 ...> Example: .SUBCKT OPAMP 1 2 3 4 A subcircuit definition must begin with a .SUBCKT statement. SUBNAM is the subcircuit name, and N1, N2, ... are the external visible nodes (port identifiers), which cannot be zero. The group of element statements which immediately follow the .SUBCKT statement defines the subcircuit. The last statement in a subcircuit definition is the .ENDS statement (see below). Control statements and device models may not appear within a subcircuit definition; however, subcircuit definitions may contain anything else, including other subcircuit definitions and subcircuit calls (see below), except cell definitions and cell calls. Note that any subcircuit definitions
  • 168. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Simulation Control Statements DWS Chapter 8 7-4 included as part of a subcircuit definition are strictly local (i.e., such definitions are not known outside the subcircuit definition). Also, any element nodes not included within the .SUBCKT statement are strictly local, with the exception of 0 (ground) which is always global. For this reason, internal node numbers (port identifiers) can be reused outside the subcircuit definition. 7.2.2 .ENDS Statement General form: .ENDS <SUBNAM> Example: .ENDS OPAMP This statement must be the last one for each subcircuit definition. The subcircuit name, if included, indicates which subcircuit definition is being terminated for user documentation. 7.2.3 Subcircuit Calls General form: XYYYYYYY N1' <N2' N3' ...> SUBNAM Example: X1 2 4 17 3 OPAMP Subcircuits are used in DWS by specifying pseudo-elements beginning with the letter X, followed by the circuit nodes to be used in expanding the subcircuit. In the expanded network the suffix .XYYYYYYY will be added at each element name of the subcircuit instance .
  • 169. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Simulation Control Statements DWS Chapter 8 7-5 7.3 Chains of Cells Cascade connection (chain) of repetitive blocks (cells) can be quickly described using .CELL statement for cell definition and .CHAIN statement to build up cell connections. To be identified, a cell must have at least one input node (port) and one output node (port). In general, a set of input nodes, a corresponding set of output nodes and an optional set of visible nodes have to be defined within the cell definition. The cascade connection of cells will be implemented during netlist expansion by superimposing the output node of a cell to the corresponding input node of the next cell in the chain. Intermediate cell inputs will assume the number (port identifier) of corresponding output node in the expanded netlist. All expanded chain port identifiers (input, outputs, visible nodes) will be coded with a numeric suffix corresponding to the position of the instanced cell within the chain. input nodes output nodes Visible nodes Ni1 V V V N N N N N CELLNAM i2 ik 1 2 i o1 o2 ok A cell can consist of any DWS elements (except subcircuits) and is defined by a grouping of element statements; the program then automatically inserts the group of elements wherever the cell is referenced. There is no limit on the size or complexity of cells. 7.3.1 .CELL Statement General Form .CELL CELLNAM N1 <N2 N3 ...> A cell definition must begin with a .CELL statement. CELLNAM is the cell name, and N1, N2, ... are all the external nodes, which cannot be zero, including
  • 170. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Simulation Control Statements DWS Chapter 8 7-6 inputs, outputs and visible nodes. The group of element statements which immediately follow the .CELL statement defines the cell. The last statement in a cell definition is the .ENDC statement (see below). Control statements and device models may not appear within a cell definition, as cell definitions may only contain element statements. Any element nodes not included within the .CELL statement are strictly local, with the exception of 0 (ground) which is always global. Multiple nesting of cell definition and nesting of cell definition within subcircuit definition or viceversa are not allowed. 7.3.2 .ENDC Statement General form: .ENDC <CELLNAM> This statement must be the last one for any cell definition. The cell name is optional. 7.3.3 Cell Calls General form: .CHAIN n*CELLNAM I: Ni1, Ni2, ... ; O: No1, No2, ...
  • 171. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Simulation Control Statements DWS Chapter 8 7-7 Cells are used in DWS by specifying .CHAIN statements. Each cell, defined by a .CELL statement, must be called by only one .CHAIN statement. The number of cells is 1  n  9999. The assigned name of the I/O nodes in the expanded chain of cells is Ndddd, where N is an output cell node in .CHAIN statement and dddd is the current cell number, with the exception of the input nodes of the first cell in the chain for which the assigned name is Ni0001. The assigned name of the other external nodes is Ndddd, where N is an external node in .CELL statement. Some care in node identifier assignement must be taken in order to avoid unwanted connections in the network topology, because the external nodes in the expanded chain of cells are visible at the top level of circuit description and the expansion procedure could compose names already declared at top level.
  • 172. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Simulation Control Statements DWS Chapter 8 8-8 Chapter 8 S i m u l a t i o n C o n t r o l S t a t e m e n t s 8. 8 8.1 .OPTIONS Statement 8.2 .TRAN Statement
  • 173. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Simulation Control Statements DWS Chapter 8 8-9 8.1 .OPTIONS Statement Different DWS functioning mode can be selected by means of .OPTIONS statement, which operates like SPICE .OPTIONS card. If no option is specified, the default values will be automatically assumed. General form: .OPTIONS <GMIN=value> <GMAX=value> <MODLIST> <DELAYMETH=name> The limits of conductance range can be modified using GMIN and GMAX options. GMIN resets the value of GMIN, the minimum conductance allowed by the program. The default value is 1.0E-9. GMAX resets the value of GMAX, the maximum conductance allowed by the program. The default value is 1.0E6. The use of GMIN and GMAX is specified at each element description. If MODLIST option is specified, the program lists all model parameters. DELAYMETH option sets delay discretization method. ROUNDING method (DELAYMETH=ROUNDING) rounds all user-specified element delays to the closest time-step multiple value. INTERPOLATION method (DELAYMETH=INTERPOLATION) linearly interpolates the outputs from the two time-step multiples delimiting the interval containing the user-specified delay (see also 1.2.5). If the parameter DELAYMETH is omitted, it is assumed to be ROUNDING.
  • 174. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Simulation Control Statements DWS Chapter 8 8-10 8.2 .TRAN Statement .TRAN statement sets all information regarding simulation time step, simulation time-window, the maximum number of stored samples and specifies the identifier of simulated waveforms to be stored in the .g output file (see also 1.2.6). General form: .TRAN TSTEP=value TSTOP=value <TSTART=value> <LIMPTS=value> <UIC> V(N) V(N1,N2) I(elem,N) P(elem,N) A(elem,N) B(elem,N) Y(elem,N) Z(elem,N) Q(elem,N) R(elem,N) G(elem,N) Examples: .TRAN TSTEP=10PS TSTOP=5NS V(10) P(TLINE,10) Z(TLINE,10) .TRAN TSTEP=1NS TSTOP=1US TSTART=500NS V(10,20) I(RTERM,40) .TRAN TSTEP=100PS TSTOP=100NS LIMPTS=500 UIC V(50) I(CIN,50) TSTEP is the user-specified simulation time-step. TSTOP is the end of simulation time-window. TSTART is the time at which the simulator begins to save the results of the analysis. If TSTART is omitted, it is assumed to be zero. The transient analysis always begins at time zero. In the interval <zero, TSTART>, the circuit is analyzed (to reach a steady state), but no outputs are stored. In the interval <TSTART, TSTOP>, the circuit is analyzed and outputs are stored. LIMPTS is the number of samples per simulated waveform to be stored in the .g output file at the end of simulation loop. If LIMPTS = 0 only the last sample of each output waveform will be saved in .g file.
  • 175. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Simulation Control Statements DWS Chapter 8 8-11 If LIMPTS = 1 only the first sample of each output waveform will be saved in .g file. If LIMPTS > (TSTOP-TSTART)/TSTEP, the number of stored samples per waveform is limited to (TSTOP-TSTART)/TSTEP. If LIMPTS < (TSTOP-TSTART)/TSTEP, stored output samples are obtained by linear interpolation of simulated values. If LIMPTS is omitted, it is assumed to be (TSTOP-TSTART)/TSTEP.] If UIC (Use Initial Conditions) option is specified, the program uses the values specified using the keyword IC=... on the various elements as the starting condition for the simulation. The .TRAN statement specifies also the output waveforms. At all element ports are available the following variables types: V(N) : voltage at node (port) N referenced to ground (node 0) V(N1,N2) : voltage at node (port) N1 referenced to node (port) N2 (differential voltage) I(elem,N): input current at port N of element elem P(elem,N): instantaneous input power at port N of element elem At ports of elements acting as reference impedance sources are also available the following variables: A(elem,N): incident voltage wave at port N of element elem B(elem,N): reflected voltage wave at port N of element elem Y(elem,N): reference admittance of port N of element elem Z(elem,N): reference impedance of port N of element elem ( Z=1/Y ) Q(elem,N): incident instantaneous power at port N of element elem R(elem,N): reflected instantaneous power at port N of element elem G(elem,N): B/A ratio at port N of element elem
  • 177. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Index DWS I-1 INDEX A adaptor bimodal 6-5 adaptor series 6-3 adaptors 5-1 adaptors multimodal 6-7 algorithm 1-3 amplitude modulation 3-18 B bimodal adaptors 6-5 binary digit sequence 3-19 burst sequence 3-22 C capacitor, initial conditions 2-41 cell calls 7-6 CELL statement 7-5 CHAIN statement 7-6 chains of cells 7-5 characteristic impedance 2-47 circuit description 1-16 comments 1-20 Complexity Factor, Cf 1-21 controlled source function 3-18 controlled sources 3-1 current-controlled current sources 4-9 current-controlled resistors 2-24 current-controlled voltage sources 4-7 D DC resistor function 2-9 DC source function 3-5 decoupling 2-5; 2-7; 2-22; 2-26; 2-49 defining reference impedance 2-49 delay time 2-47 delta resistor function 2-14 delta source function 3-11 description, circuit 1-16 dynamic response, unit-step 2-34; 4-21 dynamic transfer function, S-plane 2-37; 4-24 dynamic transfer function, Z-plane 2-39; 4-26 dynamic transfer functions 2-33; 4-20 E elements 1-4 En 1-21 ENDC statement 7-6 ENDS statement 7-4 erfc resistor function 2-13 erfc source function 3-10 even mode 2-47 F file resistor function 2-18 file source function 3-15 file static transfer function 2-30; 4-17 file_name 1-18 format output 1-18
  • 178. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Index DWS I-2 frequency modulation 3-18 H hysteresis static transfer function 2-32 hysteresis static transfer function 4-19 I ideal transformers 2-51 independent current sources 3-4 independent source functions 3-5 Independent voltage sources 3-3 inductor, initial conditions 2-43 initial conditions, capacitor 2-41 initial conditions, inductors 2-43 input format 1-17 interpolation 1-3 J junction diodes 2-53 L linear capacitors 2-41 linear inductors 2-43 linear resistors 2-3 linear static transfer function 2-28; 4-15 list_of_samples 1-20 M memory 1-15 modulation 3-18 multiconductor transmission lines 6-2 multimodal adaptors 6-7 multiplying controlled sources 4-11 N network complexity 1-3; 1-21 network summary 1-21 Nn 1-21 non-linear resistors 2-4 number_of_samples 1-18 number_of_waveforms 1-18 O odd mode 2-47 option DELAYMETH 1-3 options -r -s 1-22 OPTIONS statement 8-2 output format 1-18 P passive elements 1-1 periodic sequence 3-22 phase modulation 3-18 Piece-Wise Linear resistors 2-4 piece-wise linear static transfer function 2-29 polynomial resistor 2-11 polynomial source 3-7 port variables 1-4 ports 1-4 PSEQ 3-22 pulse resistor function 2-10 pulse source function 3-6 pulseerfc resistor function 2-12 pulseerfc source function 3-9 pulsefile resistor function 2-19 pulsefile source function 3-16 pulsepoly resistor function 2-11 pulsepoly source function 3-7 PulsePwl resistor function 2-17 PulsePwl source function 3-14 PWL fitting 1-2 PWL resistor function 2-16
  • 179. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Index DWS I-3 PWL resistors 2-4 PWL source function 3-13 PWL static transfer function 4-16 R reference impedance 1-9 report file 1-21 report option 1-22 S sampling_timestep 1-18 sequence definition 3-20 series adaptor 6-3 silent option 1-22 single sequence 3-21 sinusoidal resistor function 2-15 sinusoidal source function 3-12 S-parameter description 5-8 S-parameter elements 4-1 S-Parameters four-port elements 5-7 one-port elements 5-4 three-port elements 5-6 two-port elements 5-5 Specific Elapsed Time , SET 1-21 s-plane dynamic transfer function 2-37; 4-24 DWS 1-2 DWS features 1-2 SSEQ 3-21 start_time 1-19 starting DWS 1-22 statement .CELL 7-5 statement .CHAIN 7-6 statement .ENDC 7-6 statement .ENDS 7-4 statement .OPTIONS 8-2 statement .SUBCKT 7-3 statement .TRAN 8-3 static transfer functions 2-28; 4-15 statistics 1-21 subcircuit calls 7-4 SUBCKT statement 7-3 syntax 1-2 T threshold static transfer function 2-31; 4-18 Time step 1-3 time-controlled resistors 2-6 time-domain characterization 1-2 TRAN Statement 8-3 transmission lines 2-47 transmission lines, Td, Z0 2-47 transmission lines, UIC 2-48 two-port elements 1-6 U UIC option 2-41; 2-43 unbalanced transmission lines 2-45 unit delays 1-5 unit-delay transmission lines 2-49 unit-step dynamic response 2-34; 4-21 V variable summary 1-21 voltage-controlled current sources 4-5 voltage-controlled resistors 2-20 voltage-controlled voltage sources 4-3 W wave equations 1-4 waveform_name 1-19
  • 180. Copyright 1985-2015 Piero Belforte , Giancarlo Guaschino Index DWS I-4 Z z-plane dynamic transfer function 2-39